Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................7
Learning about the printer...........................................................................9
Finding information about the printer......................................................................................................9
Selecting a location for the printer..........................................................................................................10
Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................11
Basic functions of the scanner.................................................................................................................13
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass..............................................................................................14
Understanding the printer control panel................................................................................................15
Understanding the home screen................................................................17
Understanding the home screen.............................................................................................................17
Using the touch-screen buttons..............................................................................................................18
Setting up and using the home screen applications....................................22
Finding the IP address of the printer.......................................................................................................22
Accessing the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................................................22
Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server...........................................23
Activating the home screen applications................................................................................................24
Setting up Remote Operator Panel.........................................................................................................25
Additional printer setup.............................................................................27
Installing internal options........................................................................................................................27
Installing optional trays...........................................................................................................................38
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................52
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................53
Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................53
Networking..............................................................................................................................................54
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact........................................62
Saving paper and toner...........................................................................................................................62
Saving energy..........................................................................................................................................63
Recycling..................................................................................................................................................66
Contents 2
Loading paper and specialty media............................................................68
Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................68
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................68
Loading the standard or optional 550‑sheet tray...................................................................................68
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................72
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................75
Paper and specialty media guidelines.........................................................77
Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................77
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................80
Printing......................................................................................................83
Printing a document................................................................................................................................83
Printing from a flash drive.......................................................................................................................84
Printing on specialty media.....................................................................................................................86
Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................88
Printing information pages......................................................................................................................89
Using Max Speed and Max Yield.............................................................................................................90
Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................90
Copying......................................................................................................92
Making copies.........................................................................................................................................92
Customizing copy settings.......................................................................................................................93
Placing information on copies.................................................................................................................98
Canceling a copy job................................................................................................................................99
Understanding the copy screens and options.........................................................................................99
E-mailing..................................................................................................102
Getting ready to e-mail.........................................................................................................................102
Creating an e-mail shortcut...................................................................................................................103
E-mailing a document............................................................................................................................104
Customizing e-mail settings...................................................................................................................105
Canceling an e-mail...............................................................................................................................105
Understanding the e-mail options........................................................................................................105
Faxing......................................................................................................108
Getting the printer ready to fax............................................................................................................108
Contents 3
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................113
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................114
Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................116
Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................117
Understanding the fax options..............................................................................................................118
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................120
Scanning...................................................................................................122
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................122
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................123
Scanning to a computer or to a flash drive...........................................................................................124
Understanding the FTP options.............................................................................................................126
Understanding the printer menus............................................................129
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................129
Supplies menu.......................................................................................................................................130
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................132
Reports menu........................................................................................................................................141
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................143
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................155
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................160
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................212
Securing the memory before moving the printer......................................214
Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................214
Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................214
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................215
Erasing printer hard disk memory.........................................................................................................215
Configuring printer hard disk encryption..............................................................................................216
Maintaining the printer............................................................................218
Cleaning the exterior of the printer......................................................................................................218
Cleaning the scanner glass....................................................................................................................218
Cleaning the ADF parts..........................................................................................................................219
Cleaning the printhead lenses...............................................................................................................220
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................223
Checking the status of supplies.............................................................................................................224
Contents 4
Ordering supplies..................................................................................................................................224
Replacing supplies.................................................................................................................................226
Moving the printer................................................................................................................................232
Administrative support............................................................................233
Finding printer security information.....................................................................................................233
Using the Embedded Web Server.........................................................................................................233
Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................233
Checking the status of the printer.........................................................................................................233
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................234
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................234
Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................234
Clearing jams............................................................................................236
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................236
Understanding jam numbers and locations..........................................................................................236
200 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................238
201 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................239
203 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................240
230 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................240
231–239 paper jams..............................................................................................................................241
24x paper jam........................................................................................................................................242
250 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................245
280–289 paper jams..............................................................................................................................245
290–292 paper jams..............................................................................................................................246
451 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................246
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................247
Solving basic printer problems..............................................................................................................247
Understanding the printer messages....................................................................................................247
Solving printing problems.....................................................................................................................260
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................263
Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................266
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................268
Solving home screen application problems...........................................................................................272
Solving option problems........................................................................................................................273
Solving paper feed problems.................................................................................................................275
Contents 5
Solving print quality problems..............................................................................................................276
Solving color quality problems..............................................................................................................287
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................290
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................291
Notices.....................................................................................................292
Product information..............................................................................................................................292
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................292
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................296
Index........................................................................................................311
Contents 6
Safety information
Connect the power cord directly to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or other types of surge or UPS devices. The power rating capacity of these types of
accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in poor printer performance, property
damage, or potential fire.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Lift the printer off the optional drawer, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same
time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce risk of fire, use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided
with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public
switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Safety information 7
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug
the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information 8
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
• Connecting the printer
• Installing the printer software
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
• Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
• Loading paper
• Configuring printer settings
• Viewing and printing documents and photos
• Setting up and using the printer software
• Configuring the printer on a network
• Caring for and maintaining the printer
• Troubleshooting and solving problems
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides are
available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Note: These guides are also available in other
languages.
Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility
features of your printer
Lexmark Accessibility Guide—This guide is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program
or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
• The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.
Learning about the printer 9
What are you looking for? Find it here
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
• Documentation
• Driver downloads
• Live chat support
• E‑mail support
• Voice support
Lexmark support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the support Web
site or on the printed warranty that came with your
printer.
Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:
• Machine Type number
• Serial number
• Date purchased
• Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
• In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
• In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with this printer.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them too. It is important to:
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators
– Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations
– Clean, dry, and free of dust
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Learning about the printer 10
1
2
3
5
4
1 348 mm (13.7 in.)
2 609.6 mm (24 in.)
3 100 mm (3.94 in.)
4 100 mm (3.94 in.)
5 285 mm (11.22 in.)
Printer configurations
Basic model
Notes:
• The printer stand is a cabinet that can be converted into a caster base.
• If used with a printer stand, then the printer supports only one optional 550-sheet tray.
• If used with a caster base, then the printer supports a maximum of three optional 550-sheet trays.
Learning about the printer 11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
2 ADF input tray
3 ADF exit bin
4 Multipurpose feeder
5 Standard 150‑sheet tray (Tray 1)
6 Standard 250‑sheet tray (Tray 2)
7 Standard exit bin
8 Printer control panel
Configured model
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor‑mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high‑capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Learning about the printer 12
9
10
11
9 Optional 550‑sheet trays
10 Caster base (converted from a printer stand)
11 Printer stand
Basic functions of the scanner
The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for large workgroups. You can:
• Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs.
• Send a fax using the printer control panel.
• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF by way of FTP).
Learning about the printer 13
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents, including
duplex pages.
Use the scanner glass for single pages or book pages, small items
(such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin
media (such as magazine clippings).
Using the ADF
• Load documents into the ADF faceup, as indicated by the ADF paper icon.
• Load up to 100 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.
• Scan sizes from 76.2 x 139.7 mm (3.0 x 5.5 in.) to 296.9 x 431.8 mm (11.69 x 17 in.).
• Scan documents with mixed page sizes (Letter and Legal).
• Scan media weights from 64 to 120 g/m
2
(16 to 32 lb).
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
• Unlock the scanner glass by sliding the button to the left.
1 2
• Place documents facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Learning about the printer 14
• Scan or copy documents up to 296.9 x 431.8 mm (11.69 x 17 in.).
• Copy books up to 25.4 mm (1 in.) thick.
Understanding the printer control panel
1
@!.
2
ABC
3
DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ
*
0
#
1 2 3 4
67
5
Item Description
1 Display Shows the status of the printer, and allows printer setup and operation
2 Indicator light
• Off—The printer is off.
• Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
• Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.
• Blinking red—The printer requires operator intervention is needed.
3 Sleep Enables Sleep Mode or Hibernate Mode
The following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button:
• Entering or waking from Sleep Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button
is unilluminated.
• Operating in Sleep Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button is
illuminated solid amber.
• Entering or waking from Hibernate Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep
button is illuminated blinking amber.
• Operating in Hibernate Mode—The indicator light is unilluminated, Sleep button is blinking
amber for 1/10 of a second, then go completely unilluminated for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.
The following actions wake the printer from Sleep Mode:
• Touching the screen or any hard button presses.
• Opening an input tray, cover, or door.
• Sending a print job from the computer.
• Performing a Power On Reset (POR) with the main power switch.
4 Keypad Lets you enter numbers, letter, or symbols
5 Submit Lets you submit changes made in the printer settings
6 Stop/Cancel Stops all printer activity
Note: A list of option is displayed once Stopped appears on the display.
Learning about the printer 15
Item Description
7 Home Lets you navigate back to the home screen
Learning about the printer 16
Understanding the home screen
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to
messages.
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Touch To
Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
E-mail Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
Access the printer menus.
Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.
FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.
Status message bar
• Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Status/Supplies
• Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue
processing.
• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
USB or USB Thumbdrive View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This button appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or
flash drive is connected to the printer.
Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any
other application.
Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
Understanding the home screen 17
Other buttons that may appear on the home screen:
Touch To
Search held jobs Search on any of the following items:
• User name for held or confidential print jobs
• Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
• Profile names
• Bookmark container or print job names
• USB container or print job names for supported file types
Release Held Fax Access the list of held faxes.
Note: This button appears only when there are held faxes with a
scheduled hold time previously set.
Lock Device Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to lock the
printer control panel.
Note: This button appears only when the printer is unlocked and
password has been set.
Unlock Device Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to unlock
the printer control panel.
Note: This button appears only when the printer is locked. The
printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while
this appears.
Cancel Jobs Open the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three
headings: Print, Fax, and Network.
The following options are available under the Print, Fax, and Network
headings:
• Print job
• Copy job
• Fax profile
• FTP
• E-mail send
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can
show only three jobs per screen. If more than three jobs exist in a
column, then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.
Change Language Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that allows you to change
the primary language of the printer.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings and
administrative setup.
Understanding the home screen 18
Sample touch screen
Submit
Touch To
Submit Submit changes made in the printer settings.
Sample Copy Print a sample copy.
Right arrow
Scroll to the right.
Left arrow
Scroll to the left.
Home
Return to the home screen.
Right increase
Select a higher value.
Left decrease
Select a lower value.
Exit
Exit from the current screen.
Understanding the home screen 19
Touch To
Tips
Open a context-sensitive Help dialog on the touch screen.
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch To
Accept
Save a setting.
Cancel
• Cancel an action or a selection.
• Exit a screen and lets you return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset
Reset values on the screen.
Radio button
Select or clear an item.
Features
Feature Description
Menu trail line:
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >
Number of Copies
A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the
path taken to arrive at the current menu.
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you touch an
underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is
set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default
setting.
Attendance message alert
If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.
Understanding the home screen 20
Feature Description
Warning
If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Understanding the home screen 21
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
• Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only in some printer
models.
• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
• From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.
1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the printer control panel home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3 Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Showing or hiding icons on the home screen
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
A list of basic printer functions appears.
2 Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen.
Cleared check box items are hidden.
3 Click Submit.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 22
Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded
Web Server
You can export configuration settings into a text file that can then be imported and used to apply the settings to one
or more additional printers.
Exporting a configuration
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings or Configuration.
2 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
3 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
4 Click Configure > Export.
5 Follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file, and then enter a unique file name or
use the default name.
Note: If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs, then repeat the export until the configuration file is saved.
Importing a configuration
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings or Configuration.
2 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
3 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
4 Click Configure > Import.
5 Browse to the saved configuration file, and then load or preview it.
Note: If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the browser, and then click Apply.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 23
Activating the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. You can activate and set up these applications using
the Embedded Web Server. To access the Embedded Web Server, see
“Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on
page 22.
For detailed information about configuring and using the home screen applications, go to the Lexmark support Web
site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Icon Description
The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print
frequently used online forms directly from the home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Forms and Favorites.
3 Define the bookmarks, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up Scan to Network
Icon Description
The application lets you capture a digital image of a hard‑copy document and route it to a shared network
folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations.
Notes:
• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Scan to Network.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 24
3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.
Setting up My MFP
Icon Description
The application lets you customize your touch‑screen settings and store those preferences in a flash
drive. Each time you want to copy, fax, or scan, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer. All
your personal preferences are automatically uploaded, including job settings, home screen preferences,
and address book.
Note: The icon appears only when a flash drive with My MFP settings is inserted into the USB port of
the printer.
To set up My MFP, insert a flash drive into the USB port of the printer, and then follow the instructions on the printer
display to run the setup wizard.
To use My MFP, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer when you want to copy, fax, or scan.
Understanding WS‑Scan
Icon Description
The Web Services‑Scan application lets you scan documents at the network printer, and then send the
scanned image to your computer. WS‑Scan is a Microsoft application that is similar to Scan to Network,
but has the capability of sending the scanned image to a Windows‑based application. To learn more
about WS‑Scan, see the Microsoft documentation.
Note: The icon appears on the printer home screen only when there is a computer registered with the
network printer. The computer must have either Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista operating
system installed.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control
panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer
status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing
at the network printer.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Remote Operator Panel.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 25
3 Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, from the Embedded Web Server, click Applications > Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC
Applet.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 26
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards.
Available internal options
• Memory cards
– Printer memory
– Flash memory
– Fonts
• Firmware cards
– Bar Code
– PrintCryption
TM
• Printer hard disk
Accessing the system board
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 27
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
1 Turn the screws clockwise to loosen them.
2 Pull the cover forward to remove it.
3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connectors.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
Additional printer setup 28
1
2
3
1 Memory card connector
2 Firmware and flash memory card connectors
3 ISP connector
4 Reattach the cover.
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the system board” on page 27.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2 Unpack the memory card.
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
Additional printer setup 29
3 On the system board, open the memory card connector latches.
4 Align the notches on the memory card to the ridges on the connector.
1 Notch
2 Ridge
Additional printer setup 30
5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place.
2
1
6 Reattach the system board cover.
Installing a flash memory or firmware card
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be installed,
but the connectors are interchangeable.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2 Unpack the card.
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.
2
1
1 Plastic pins
2 Metal pins
Additional printer setup 31
4 Push the card firmly into place.
Notes:
• The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.
• Be careful not to damage the connectors.
5 Reattach the system board cover.
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The system board supports one optional Lexmark
TM
Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the system board” on page 27.
2 Remove the printer hard disk.
For more information, see
“Removing a printer hard disk” on page 36
Additional printer setup 32
3 Remove the two screws.
4 Unpack the ISP kit.
1
2
3
4
1 ISP solution
2 Screws for the ISP solution
3 Screws for the plastic bracket
4 Plastic bracket
5 Use the provided screws to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP solution.
Additional printer setup 33
6 Use the provided screw to attach the ISP solution to the system board cage.
Additional printer setup 34
7 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
8 Firmly connect the ISP solution to the system board cage using two screws.
Installing a printer hard disk
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 35
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
for more information, see
“Accessing the system board” on page 27
2 Remove the metal bracket from the printer hard disk using a flathead screwdriver.
3 Connect the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP board.
4 Reattach the system board cover.
Removing a printer hard disk
The printer hard disk is preinstalled in this device.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
Additional printer setup 36
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the system board” on page 27.
2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard
disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling
the cable out.
3 Remove the screws while holding the printer hard disk in place.
Additional printer setup 37
4 Remove the printer hard disk.
5 Reattach the system board cover.
Installing optional trays
Order of installation
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Install the printer and any options you have purchased in the following order:
• Printer stand
• Optional 550‑sheet trays
• Printer
For more information on converting a printer stand to caster base, and installing a printer stand, caster base or optional
550-sheet tray, see the documentation that came with the printer option.
Installing a printer stand and optional tray
Note: If used with a printer stand, then the printer supports only one optional 550‑sheet tray.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
Additional printer setup 38
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Note: This task requires a screwdriver.
1 Unpack the optional tray and printer stand, and then remove all packing material.
1
3
2
4
1 Optional 550-sheet tray
2 Printer stand
3 Brackets and screws
4 Thumbscrews
2 Turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 39
3 Attach the thumbscrews on top of the printer stand.
4 Align the optional tray to the printer stand, then lower the printer to the tray.
Additional printer setup 40
5 Lock the standard and optional trays together using the brackets that came with the optional tray.
a Open the standard 250- and optional 550‑sheet tray.
b Remove the screw from the 250‑sheet tray.
c Place a bracket over the screw hole and secure it with the screw.
d Close the trays.
Additional printer setup 41
6 Lock the optional 550‑sheet tray to the printer stand.
a Open the optional 550‑sheet tray and remove the screw.
b Open the printer stand.
c Place a bracket over the screw hole and secure it with the screw.
d Close the optional tray and printer stand.
Additional printer setup 42
7 Plug in the electrical connections between trays.
8 Attach brackets to the back of the printer, optional tray, and printer stand.
1
2
1 Bracket to lock optional tray to printer
2 Bracket to lock optional tray to printer stand
a Insert brackets on the slots located at the back of the optional tray and printer stand.
Additional printer setup 43
b Secure the brackets with screws.
c Insert brackets on the slots located at the back of the printer and optional tray.
d Secure the brackets with screws.
Additional printer setup 44
9 Insert the bases on the slots at the sides of the printer stand and secure them with screws.
10 Turn the printer back on.
11 Set the printer software to recognize the optional input source.
For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 53.
Installing 550‑sheet trays
Notes:
• The printer supports a maximum of three optional 550‑sheet trays.
• When installing three optional 550‑sheet trays, use a printer stand converted into a caster base.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Note: This task requires a screwdriver.
Additional printer setup 45
1 Unpack the optional tray and the printer stand, and then remove all packing material.
1
3
2
4
1 Optional 550-sheet tray
2 Printer stand
3 Brackets and screws
4 Thumbscrews
2 Turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices
attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
3 Convert the printer stand into a caster base.
a Remove the four screws inside the printer stand.
Additional printer setup 46
b Lift the upper portion of the printer stand, leaving the base.
4 Attach the thumbscrews on the caster base.
Additional printer setup 47
5 Align the trays to the caster base, then lower the printer to the trays.
6 Lock the standard and optional trays together using the brackets that came with the optional tray.
a Open the standard 250- and optional 550‑sheet tray.
Additional printer setup 48
b Remove the screw from the 250‑sheet tray.
c Place a bracket over the screw hole and secure it with the screw.
d Close the trays.
7 Lock the optional 550‑sheet trays together using the screws that came with the trays.
a Remove the upper optional 550-sheet tray drawer. Leave the lower optional trays open.
Additional printer setup 49
b Reach into the lower optional tray and insert a screw, pushing it upward to the optional tray above it.
1 2
8 Plug in the electrical connections between trays.
9 Attach brackets to the back of the printer and optional trays.
a Insert brackets on the slots located at the back of the optional trays.
b Secure the brackets with screws.
Additional printer setup 50
c Insert brackets on the slots located at the back of the printer and optional tray.
d Secure the brackets with screws.
10 Insert the bases on the slots at the sides of the caster base and secure them with screws.
11 Turn the printer back on.
12 Set the printer software to recognize the optional input source.
For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 53.
Additional printer setup 51
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable.
Be sure to match the following:
• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
1
2
1 USB port
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown
while actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
2 Ethernet port
Additional printer setup 52
Verifying printer setup
Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option and install it again.
• Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup page
to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing
configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
2 Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3 For Macintosh users, add the printer.
Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
Adding available options in the print driver
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
Additional printer setup 53
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click , or click Start and then click Run.
b Type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Select the printer you want to update, and then do either of the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
3 Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4 Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2 Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
3 Apply the changes.
Networking
Note: A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wireless Encryption Protocol (WEP)
and Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the
printer.
• A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
• The network gateway
• The network mask
• A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to
use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.
Additional printer setup 54
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
• Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.
• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
– 802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
• Authentication type
• Inner authentication type
• 802.1X user name and password
• Certificates
– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.
Notes:
– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point or contact
your system support person.
– To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)
Before installing the printer on a wireless network, make sure:
• Your wireless network is set up and is working properly.
• The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.
Additional printer setup 55
1 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
1
2
Note: Make sure the printer and the computer are fully on and ready.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen.
2 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
• From our Web site:
Go to
http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
3 Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the
following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
a
Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
4 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Additional printer setup 56
5 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type.
6 From the Wireless Configuration dialog, select Guided Setup (Recommended).
Note: Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation.
7 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.
Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so
you can print wirelessly.
8 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: For more information on allowing other computers on the network to use the wireless printer, see the
Networking Guide.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)
Note: Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network.
Prepare to configure the printer
1
Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
1
2
Additional printer setup 57
2 Locate the printer MAC address.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Reports > > Network Setup Page >
or
> Reports > Network Setup Page
b In the Standard Network Card section, look for UAA (MAC).
Note: You will need this information later.
Enter the printer information
1
Access the AirPort options:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Network > Wi‑Fi
• System Preferences > Network > AirPort
In Mac OS X version 10.4
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort
2 From the Network Name pop‑up menu, select print server [yyyyyy], where the y’s are the last six digits of the MAC
address located on the MAC address sheet.
3 Open a Web browser.
4 From the Bookmarks menu, select Show or Show All Bookmarks.
5 Under COLLECTIONS, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double‑click the printer name.
Note: The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc.
6 From the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the location of the wireless settings information.
Configure the printer for wireless access
1
Type the network name (SSID) in the appropriate field.
2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode setting if you are using an access point (wireless router).
3 Select the type of security you want to use to protect the wireless network.
4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network.
5 Click Submit.
6 Open the AirPort application on the computer:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Network > Wi‑Fi
• System Preferences > Network > AirPort
Additional printer setup 58
In Mac OS X version 10.4
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort
7 From the Network pop‑up menu, select the name of the wireless network.
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly
To print on a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in
the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
1 Install a printer driver file on the computer:
a Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
• From our Web site:
Go to
http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
b Double‑click the installer package for the printer.
c Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
d Select a destination, and then click Continue.
e From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
f Type the user password, and then click OK.
All necessary applications are installed in the computer.
g Click Close when the installation is complete.
2 Add the printer:
a For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Print & Scan
• System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +.
3 If necessary, click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner.
4 Click the IP tab.
5 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, choose Add, and then click IP Printer.
4 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.
b For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
• Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
Additional printer setup 59
• This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or earlier.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, click Add.
4 Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.
5 From the first pop‑up menu, select AppleTalk.
6 From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
7 Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.
Changing port settings after installing a new network ISP
Notes:
• If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes.
• If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to
make any changes.
• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure
the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network.
For Windows users
1
Open the printers folder.
2 From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP, open the printer properties.
3 Configure the port from the list.
4 Update the IP address.
5 Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1
From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to the list of printers, and then select + > IP.
2 Type the IP address in the address field.
3 Apply the changes.
Setting up serial printing (Windows only)
After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer.
Additional printer setup 60
Note: Serial printing reduces print speed.
1 Set the parameters in the printer.
a From the control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
b Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
c Save the settings.
2 From your computer, open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
3 Open the printer properties, and then select the COM port from the list.
4 Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager.
Use the Run dialog box to open the command prompt, and then type devmgmt.msc.
Additional printer setup 61
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see
“Using Eco‑Mode” on
page 63.
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser/LED printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see
“Using recycled
paper and other office papers” on page 78.
Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports two‑sided printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of
the paper.
Notes:
• Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
• For a complete list of supported products and countries, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
setting multiple page printing (N‑Up) for the print job.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact 62
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
• Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 236.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting > Submit.
Choose To
Off Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. This setting supports the performance
specifications of your printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
• Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first
page is printed.
• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
• When the printer enters Sleep mode, the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin lights
are turned off.
• If scanning is supported, the scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode.
Paper
• Enable the automatic duplex feature.
• Turn off print log features.
Reducing printer noise
To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting > Submit.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact 63
Choose To
Off
Note: Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed
printing.
Use factory default settings. This setting supports the
performance specifications of your printer.
On Reduce printer noise.
• Print jobs will process at a reduced speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a document is
ready to print. There will be a short delay before the first
page is printed.
• If your printer has faxing capability, fax sounds are
reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax
speaker and ringer. The fax is placed in standby mode.
• The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned
off.
• The printer will ignore the Advance Start command.
Adjusting Sleep mode
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3 Apply the changes.
Using Hibernate Mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and
all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.
3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop‑down, select Hibernate.
4 Click Submit.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact 64
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button > Hibernate
2 Touch Submit.
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading the display, adjust its brightness settings.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.
Setting the standard exit bin light
To save energy, you can dim or turn off the output lighting for the standard exit bin.
Available settings are Off, Dim, and Bright.
The factory default setting for Normal/Standby Mode is Bright.
When Eco‑Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper, then the light setting is Dim.
When in Sleep Mode, then the light is off.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Output Lighting.
3 From the Normal/Standby Mode list, select the light setting for the standard exit bin when in Ready or Standby
mode.
4 Click Submit.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact 65
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Output Lighting
2 Touch the arrow button next to Normal/Standby Mode to select the light settings for the standard exit bin
when in Ready or Standby Mode.
3 Touch Submit.
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:
• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact 66
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact 67
Loading paper and specialty media
Setting the paper size and type
The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the
multipurpose feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size
menu. The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper.
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal Paper Size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:
• Units of Measure
• Portrait Width
• Portrait Height
Note: The maximum setting for Portrait Width and Portrait Height is 3–48 inches.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height > select the width or height > Submit
Loading the standard or optional 550‑sheet tray
The printer has a standard 150‑sheet (Tray 1) and 250‑sheet tray (Tray 2), and it may have one or more optional
550‑sheet trays. All 550‑sheet trays support the same paper sizes and types.
Loading paper and specialty media 68
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
1 Pull the tray out.
Notice the size indicators at the bottom of the tray. Use these indicators to help position the guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 69
2 Make sure to release the width guide lock at the rear of the tray. Squeeze and then slide the width guide to the
correct position for the paper size you are loading.
2
3
1
Note: Always use the width guide lock at the rear of the tray to prevent the margins from being knocked out of
adjustment.
3 Squeeze and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
5 Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup.
Loading paper and specialty media 70
Notes:
• If the paper is longer than A4, then load it in short‑edge orientation.
• If the paper is shorter than A4, then load it in long‑edge orientation.
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray. Overloading the
tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
Long‑edge orientation Short‑edge orientation
6 Adjust both the width and length guides to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack. Make sure the paper fits loosely
in the tray, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.
7 Turn the wheel clockwise to set the paper size.
Loading paper and specialty media 71
8 Lock the width guide.
9 Insert the tray.
10 From the printer control panel, verify the Paper Size and Paper Type for the tray based on the paper you loaded.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
The multipurpose feeder can hold several sizes and types of print media, such as transparencies, labels, card stock, and
envelopes. It can be used for single-page or manual printing, or as an additional tray.
The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately:
• 50 sheets of 75‑g/m
2
(20‑lb) paper
• 10 envelopes
Loading paper and specialty media 72
• 20 transparencies
Note: Do not add or remove paper or specialty media when the printer is printing from the multipurpose feeder or
when the printer control panel indicator light is blinking. Doing so may cause a jam.
1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
2 Gently pull the extension until it is fully extended.
3 Flex the sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease them. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
Loading paper and specialty media 73
Paper
Envelopes
Transparencies
Note: Avoid scratching or touching the print side.
4 Load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
Notes:
• Load A3‑, A6‑, 11x17, JIS B4‑, Statement‑ and legal‑size media in short‑edge orientation.
• Load A4‑, A5‑, Exec‑, JIS B5‑ and letter‑size media in long‑edge orientation.
• Load envelopes flap side up in short‑edge orientation.
• Do not exceed the maximum amount of media that the multipurpose feeder can hold.
• Load only one size and type of paper at a time.
Long‑edge orientation Short‑edge orientation
Loading paper and specialty media 74
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
5 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the stack. Make sure the paper or specialty media fits loosely in
the multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.
6 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type for the multipurpose feeder (MP Feeder Size and
MP Feeder Type) based on the paper or specialty media loaded.
Linking and unlinking trays
Linking trays
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or for printing multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds
from the next linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are
automatically linked. The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in
each tray except Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set
manually from the Paper Size menu. The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu. The
Paper Type menu and the Paper Size menu are both available from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Unlinking trays
Note: Trays that do not have the same settings as any other tray are not linked.
Change one of the following tray settings:
• Paper Type
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked
trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type [x], or define your own custom name.
• Paper Size
Load a different paper size to automatically change the Paper Size setting for a tray. Paper Size settings for the
multipurpose feeder are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper
loaded in a tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Prints may not be
properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.
Loading paper and specialty media 75
Creating a custom name for a paper type
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2 Type a custom paper type name, and then apply the changes.
3 Touch Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3 Touch Submit.
Configuring a custom name
If the printer is on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x]
for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types > select the custom name you want to configure > select a paper or
specialty media type > Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media 76
Paper and specialty media guidelines
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these factors before printing on them:
Weight
The printer trays and multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights between 60–176 g/m
2
(16–47‑lb) grain
long paper. The 2100‑sheet tray can automatically feed paper weights up to 60–135 g/m
2
(16–36‑lb) grain long paper.
Paper lighter than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, and may cause jams.
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported for 60–176 g/m
2
(16–47‑lb) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;
smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend
the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick
paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–176 g/m
2
(16–47‑lb) paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability, resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 77
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm (±0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
• Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb)
• Multiple‑part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
• Use grain long for 60–90‑g/m
2
(16–24‑lb) paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
• Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these
requirements; latex inks might not.
• Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities. This
determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will affect print quality.
• When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser and LED (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study
demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However, no
blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 78
Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper
from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found no
reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines apply
to recycled paper.
• Low moisture content (4–5%)
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser and LED papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and
much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work
very well in laser and LED printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your
paper supplier.
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m
2
[16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper
that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for
reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser or LED (electrophotographic) printing, consult your
paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still
cause paper feeding problems in any laser or LED printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal
printing conditions).
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60 percent.
• Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
• Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 79
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes, types, and weights of
paper they support.
Note: To use a paper size that is unlisted, configure a Universal Paper Size.
Supported paper sizes
Paper size and
dimension
150‑
sheet
tray
250‑
sheet
tray
520‑
sheet
tray
MP
Feeder
Manual
Paper
Manual
Envelope
Duplex ADF
Scanner
glass
A4
210 x 296.93 mm
(8.27 x 11.69 in.)
1 1 3 3
A5
148.08 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in.)
X
1 1 3 3
X
1 1
A6
105 x 148.08 mm
(4.13 x 5.83 in.)
XX X
3 3
XXX
1
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.1 in.)
X
3 3
X
1 1
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
2 2 3 3
X
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
3 3
X
2 2
Executive
184 x 267 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 in.)
XX X
3 3
X
2 2
JIS B4
257 x 364 mm
(10.12 x 14.33 in.)
3 3
X
1
A3
296.93 x 420 mm
(11.69 x 16.54 in.)
3 3
X
1
Paper size is supported if set to metric.
2
Paper size is supported if set to US.
3
Source supports size without size sensing.
4
Source supports size with size sensing.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 80
Paper size and
dimension
150‑
sheet
tray
250‑
sheet
tray
520‑
sheet
tray
MP
Feeder
Manual
Paper
Manual
Envelope
Duplex ADF
Scanner
glass
11x17
279 x 432 mm
(11 x 17 in.)
2 2 3 3
X
Oficio (México)
216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
XX X
3 3
X
4 4
Folio
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
XX X
3 3
X
1 1
Statement
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
XX X
3 3
X
2 2
Universal
89.92–
296.93 mm x 148.0
8–1219.20 mm
(3.54–
11.69 x 5.83–48 in.)
XX X
3 3
X
4 4
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98 x 191 mm
(3.875 x 7.5 in.)
XX X
3
X XXX
9 Envelope
98 x 226 mm
(3.875 x 8.9 in.)
XX X
3
X XXX
Com 10 Envelope
105 x 241 mm
(4.12 x 9.5 in.)
XX X
3
X XXX
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.33 x 8.66 in.)
XX X
3
X XXX
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
XX X
3
X XXX
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
XX X
3
X XXX
1
Paper size is supported if set to metric.
2
Paper size is supported if set to US.
3
Source supports size without size sensing.
4
Source supports size with size sensing.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 81
Paper size and
dimension
150‑
sheet
tray
250‑
sheet
tray
520‑
sheet
tray
MP
Feeder
Manual
Paper
Manual
Envelope
Duplex ADF
Scanner
glass
Other Envelope
86 x 165 mm to
216 x 356 mm
(3.375 x 6.50 in . to
8.5 x 14 in.)
XX X
3
X XXX
1
Paper size is supported if set to metric.
2
Paper size is supported if set to US.
3
Source supports size without size sensing.
4
Source supports size with size sensing.
Supported paper types and weights
The printer engine supports 60–120 g/m (16–74 lb) paper weights. The duplex unit supports 64–128 g/m (17–34 lb)
paper weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper type 150‑
sheet
tray
250‑
sheet
tray
520‑
sheet
tray
MP
Feeder
Manual
Paper
Manual
Envelope
Duplex ADF Flatbed
Paper
• Plain
• Bond
• Glossy
• Heavy Glossy
• Colored
• Custom Type [x]
• Letterhead
• Light
• Heavy
• Preprinted
• Rough/ Cotton
• Recycled
X
Card stock XXX
Transparencies XXX
Labels
• Paper
• Vinyl
XXX
Envelopes X X X X XX
Paper and specialty media guidelines 82
Printing
Printing a document
Printing a document
1 From the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2 Send the print job:
For Windows users
a
With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust the settings, if necessary.
d Click OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
a
Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options pop‑up menus, adjust the settings, if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.
Printing in black and white
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only > Submit
Adjusting toner darkness
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
Printing 83
3 Adjust the toner darkness setting.
4 Click Submit.
Printing from a mobile device
For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit
http://lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, enter the file password from the printer control panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
The USB Drive home screen appears.
Notes:
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After these
print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
Printing 84
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, any connector, the memory
device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. A
loss of data can occur.
2 From the printer control panel, touch Print from USB, and then select the document you want to print.
3 Touch the arrows to increase the number of copies to print, and then touch Print.
Notes:
• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print
files from the flash drive as held jobs.
Supported flash drives and file types
Flash drive File type
• Lexar JumpDrive 2.0 Pro (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
• SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
Notes:
• Hi‑Speed USB flash drives must support the Full‑Speed standard. Devices supporting only USB
low‑speed capabilities are not supported.
• USB flash drives must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Devices formatted with NTFS
(New Technology File System) or any other file system are not supported.
Documents:
• .pdf
• .xps
Images:
• .dcx
• .gif
• .JPEG
• .jpg
• .bmp
• .pcx
• .TIFF
• .tif
• .png
Printing 85
Printing on specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser/LED printers.
• Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Before loading letterhead, flex the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.
Source Print side Paper orientation
Standard and optional trays (simplex printing) Preprinted letterhead
design is placed faceup.
When feeding short edge, the top
edge of the sheet with the logo is
placed at the right side of the tray.
When feeding long‑edge, the
letter head should go to the rear
of the printer.
Standard and optional trays (duplex printing) Preprinted letterhead
design is placed facedown.
The top edge of the sheet with the
logo is placed at the right side of
the tray.
Multipurpose feeder (simplex printing) Preprinted letterhead
design is placed facedown.
The top edge of the sheet with the
logo should enter the
multipurpose feeder first.
Multipurpose feeder (duplex printing) Preprinted letterhead
design is placed faceup.
The top edge of the sheet with the
logo should enter the
multipurpose feeder last.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable
for laser/LED printers.
Tips on using transparencies
• Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Feed transparencies from the standard tray or from the multipurpose feeder.
• From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Transparency.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand
temperatures of 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.
• Before loading transparencies, flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
• We recommend Lexmark transparencies. For ordering information, see the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com.
Printing 86
Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that
the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m
2
(24‑lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All‑cotton envelopes
must not exceed 70‑g/m
2
(20‑lb bond) weight.
• Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist.
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
– Have an interlocking design.
– Have postage stamps attached.
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
– Have bent corners.
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Tips on using labels
Note: Use paper label sheets for occasional use only. Vinyl, pharmacy, and dual‑sided labels are not supported.
For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on
the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
When printing on labels:
• Use labels designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 210°C (410°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
Note: Labels can be printed at a higher fusing temperature up to 220°C (428°F) if Label Weight is set to
Heavy. Select this setting using the Embedded Web Server, or from the printer control panel Paper menu.
– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without
delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die‑cuts of the label.
• Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.
Printing 87
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge, and
use a non‑oozing adhesive.
• Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before
buying large quantities.
• From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Card Stock.
• Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or
other paper handling problems.
• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F)
without releasing hazardous emissions.
• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting
introduces semi‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.
• Use grain short card stock when possible.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control
panel.
All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Print job type Description
Confidential Confidential lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from
the control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.
Verify Verify lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining
copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is
automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed.
Reserve Reserve allows the printer to store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print
jobs are held until deleted from the Help Jobs menu.
Repeat Repeat prints and stores print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.
Printing 88
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.
For Windows users
1
With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Print and Hold.
4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5 Click OK or Print.
6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
For Macintosh users
1
With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print.
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing 89
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Using Max Speed and Max Yield
The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Yield
is the factory default setting.
• Max Speed—Prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the driver. Prints in black only if the Black Only driver
setting is selected.
• Max Yield—Switches from black to color based on the color content found on each page. Frequent color mode
switching can result in slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Configuration > Print Settings > Setup Menu.
3 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 Navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu
2 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
3 Touch Submit.
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press
on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Printing 90
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Double‑click the printer icon.
3 Select the print job you want to cancel.
4 Click Delete.
For Macintosh users
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue
2 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Printing 91
Copying
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 Adjust the paper guides when loading a document into the ADF.
Note: Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same. Failure to set the
proper size may result to a cropped image.
3 From the printer control panel, press to start copying.
Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 Adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It
Copying 92
Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It
3 If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Next
Page.
4 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Copying film photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >
> Photo/Film > > Copy It > Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job
Copying on transparencies or letterhead
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
3 Touch Copy to, and then select the tray or feeder that contains the specialty media.
If you select the multipurpose feeder, then specify the size and type of the paper loaded.
4 Apply the changes, and then send the job.
Customizing copy settings
Copying to a different size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from > select the size of the original document > .
5 Touch Copy to > select the size of the copy > .
Note: The printer will scale the size automatically.
6 Touch Copy It.
Copying 93
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to
4 Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use.
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will also need to select the paper size and type.
5 Touch Copy It.
Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper
size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
> Copy to > Auto Size Match > > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1
Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
> Copy to > Letter > > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.
Copying 94
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button for your preferred duplexing method.
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy. For
example, select 1‑sided to 2‑sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2‑sided copies.
5 Touch , and then Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The
factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be
scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
To reduce or enlarge a copy:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
5 Touch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying:
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphic—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
Copying 95
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
5 Touch .
6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying:
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White—Use when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer.
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7 Touch > Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated Not collated
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > Off >
> Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying 96
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Collate must be set to On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collate is set to Off,
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job.
4 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs
• Between Pages
• Off
5 Touch , and then Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.
Notes:
• The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or JIS B5.
• The Copy Size must be set to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select desired output >
> Copy It
Creating a custom copy job (job build)
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with the
same or different parameters.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
For example:
Copying 97
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Options > Custom Job > On > Done > Copy It
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.
Note: If required, change the job settings.
5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Placing information on copies
Placing the date and time at the top of each page
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer
4 Pick an area of the page where you want to place the date and time.
5 Touch Yes or No > > Copy It.
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom or Draft.
To place a message on the copies:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message >
.
4 Touch Copy It.
Copying 98
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel Job
on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press
on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Understanding the copy screens and options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size of the original document.
• Touch a paper size that matches the original document.
• Touch Mixed Sizes to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width.
• Touch Auto Size Sense to allow the scanner to automatically determine the size of the original document.
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
• If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.
• If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder,
and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching
paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a
tray or multipurpose feeder.
Copying 99
Copies
This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed.
Scale
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale can
also be set for you automatically.
• When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, setting the
“Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information
on your copy.
• Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.
• Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change.
• Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex) of
two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided copies
(simplex) from two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The
factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you
want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(3,3,3).
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Copying 100
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Save As Shortcut
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number.
Using the advanced options
These options, among other things, allow you to customize the advanced imaging settings, combine multiple jobs into
one, and clean the edges of the document.
Copying 101
E-mailing
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Getting ready to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4 Click E-mail Settings > Setup E-mail Server.
5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
6 Click Submit.
Configuring e‑mail settings
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
E-mailing 102
3 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
4 Click Submit.
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).
5 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).
6 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
2 Touch .
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
E-mailing 103
E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same. Failure to set the
proper size may result to a cropped image.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient
4 Enter the e‑mail address, or press and then enter the shortcut number.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
Note: You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5 Touch Done > Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press , enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch .
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
4 Touch Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) >
4 Search for the e‑mail shortcut or address.
5 Apply the changes, and then send the job.
E-mailing 104
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document facedown, long edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done
4 Touch Subject, then type the e‑mail subject, and then touch Done.
5 Touch Message, then type your message, and then touch Done.
Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done > Send as
3 Select the file type you want to send, and then apply the changes.
Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.
Understanding the e-mail options
Recipients
This option lets you enter the destination of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail.
E-mailing 105
Message
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e‑mail screen appears with the new
setting displayed.
• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original
document.
Resolution
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.
Color
This option sets the output color for the scanned image. Touch to enable or disable color.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
E-mailing 106
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages. This can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
• XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
• Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
• Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match the
orientation.
• Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Using the advanced options
These options, among other things, allow you to customize advanced imaging settings, combine multiple jobs into one,
and clean the edges of a document.
E-mailing 107
Faxing
Note: Faxing is available only in some printer models.
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Getting the printer ready to fax
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
The following connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions.
Note: During the initial printer setup, deselect Fax and any other function you plan to set up later, and then touch
Continue. The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.
Faxing 108
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: station name (identification of the business, other
entity, or individual sending the message) and station number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business,
other entity, or individual).
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, a series of start‑up
screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the following screens appear:
Fax Name or Station Name
Fax Number or Station Number
1 When Fax Name or Station Name appears, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
2 After entering the Fax Name or Station Name, touch Submit.
3 When Fax Number or Station Number appears, enter the printer fax number.
4 After entering the Fax Number or Station Number, touch Submit.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Faxing 109
Connecting to an analog telephone line
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US‑style (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the
equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
Connecting to a DSL service
If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then
follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.
Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.
3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.
2
3
1
Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system
If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.
Notes:
• Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.
• Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.
Faxing 110
• When using a PBX system, make sure the call waiting tone is off.
• When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.
• For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX
system.
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone
numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for
distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to
connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the scanner to the scanner LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3 Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the scanner to answer.
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the scanner to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup
b From the Answer On field, select the distinctive rings setting you want, and then touch Submit.
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region
The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone
wall jack:
Country/Region
• Austria
• Cyprus
• Denmark
• Finland
• France
• Germany
• Ireland
• Italy
• New Zealand
• Netherlands
• Norway
• Portugal
• Sweden
• Switzerland
• United Kingdom
Faxing 111
For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an answering
machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the active telephone
wall jack.
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your
location.
Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then you may
have to reset the date and time.
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
Faxing 112
3 In the Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4 Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Select the Automatically Observe DST checkbox, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time
Zone Setup section.
4 Click Submit.
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send
a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to a single
fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4 Assign a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Faxing 113
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
4 Navigate to:
> enter a name for the shortcut > Done > OK > Fax It
Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.
To add recipients, touch Next Number and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or
search the address book.
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press
. The dial pause appears as a comma in the “Fax to”
box. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.
5 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
For Windows users
1
With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Fax > Enable fax, and then enter the recipient fax number or numbers.
4 If necessary, configure other fax settings.
5 Apply the changes, and then send the fax job.
Faxing 114
Notes:
• The fax option is available only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For more information, go
to
http://support.lexmark.com.
• To use the fax option with the PostScript driver, configure and enable it in the Configuration tab.
For Macintosh users
1
With a document open, choose File > Print.
2 Select the printer.
3 Enter the recipient fax number, and then configure other fax settings, if necessary.
4 Send the fax job.
Sending a fax using shortcuts
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. A shortcut number (1–99999) can
contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the address book
The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers.
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax >
> Browse shortcuts
4 Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.
Note: Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.
5 Touch Done > Fax It.
Faxing 115
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (slowest speed, best quality).
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want.
5 Touch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document facedown, long edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 Adjust the fax darkness, and then touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Advanced Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission
are listed in the Fax Queue.
Faxing 116
4 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is
unavailable.
5 Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Viewing a fax log
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Reports.
3 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to
block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.
Faxing 117
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Understanding the fax options
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Resolution
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a
drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, then increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the
amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.
• Standard—Suitable for most documents
• Fine 200 dpi—Recommended for documents with small print
• Super fine 300 dpi—Recommended for original documents with fine detail
• Ultra fine 600 dpi—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos
Note: Fine 200 dpi and Super fine 300 dpi is displayed when color printing is selected.
Faxing 118
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.
Color
This option enables or disables color in faxing.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding settings.
• Sides (Duplex)—Use to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
• Orientation—Use to specify the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match
the orientation.
• Binding—Use to specify if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Delayed Send
This lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
1 Set up your fax.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Delayed Send > enter the date and time you want to send your fax > Done
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, then the fax is sent the next time the
printer is turned on.
This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain
hours, or when transmission times are cheaper.
Using the advanced options
These options, among other things, allow you to customize advanced imaging settings, combine multiple jobs into one,
and clean the edges of a document.
Faxing 119
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the scanner IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the scanner IP address on the scanner home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• Off
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5 Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select one of the following:
• Print
• Print and Forward
• Forward
Faxing 120
4 From the “Forward to” menu, select one of the following:
• Fax
• E‑mail
• FTP
• LDSS
• eSF
5 In the Forward to Shortcut field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6 Click Submit.
Faxing 121
Scanning
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to
an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for
creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer touch screen.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup
3 Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.
4 Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Scanning 122
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > type the FTP address >
> enter a name for the shortcut > Done
2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then
touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
3 Touch Submit.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Send It
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press , and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Touch Send It.
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP >
> enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts > name of recipient > Search
Scanning 123
Scanning to a computer or to a flash drive
ADF Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the scanner IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the scanner IP address on the scanner home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile.
3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.
5 Type a scan name.
Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6 Click Submit.
Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when you are
ready to scan your documents.
7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
a Load an original document facedown, long edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
• The ADF indicator light comes on when paper is loaded properly.
b If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Scanning 124
c Do either of the following:
• Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.
• From the scanner home screen, navigate to:
Held Jobs > Profiles > locate your shortcut on the list.
8 View the file from the computer.
Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.
Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
The USB Drive home screen appears.
4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
5 Adjust the scan settings.
6 Touch Scan It.
Understanding the Scan Center features
The Scan Center software lets you modify scan settings and select where to send the scanned output. Scan settings
modified with the Scan Center software can be saved and used for other scan jobs.
The following features are available:
• Scan and send images to your computer
• Convert scanned images to text
• Preview the scanned image and adjust the brightness and contrast
• Make larger scans without losing detail
• Scan two‑sided documents
Using the ScanBack Utility
You can use the Lexmark ScanBack
TM
Utility to create scan‑to‑PC profiles. The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from
the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
1 Set up a scan‑to‑PC profile:
a Launch the ScanBack Utility.
b Select the scanner you want to use.
If no scanners are listed, then contact your system support person to obtain a list, or click Setup to manually
search for an IP address or host name.
Scanning 125
c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind
of output you want to create.
d Select any of the following:
• Show MFP Instructions—View or print the final directions.
• Create Shortcut—Save this group of settings to use again.
e Click Finish.
A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.
2 Scan original documents:
a Load original documents in the ADF or on the scanner glass.
b From the scanner control panel, navigate to:
Scan/Email > Profiles > select your scan profile > Submit
Note: The scanned image is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.
Understanding the FTP options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: Addresses should be in dot notation form (for example: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy).
File Name
This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document.
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents for FTP sending.
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with the new setting
displayed.
• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original
document.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
• PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages. The PDF can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
• TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF
saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
Scanning 126
• JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
• XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your files will turn out in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
• Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned.
• Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides and Binding settings
to match the orientation.
• Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Scanning 127
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the original document before it is scanned completely. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Using the advanced options
These options, among other things, allow you to customize the advanced imaging settings, combine multiple jobs into
one, and clean the edges of the document.
Scanning 128
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Supplies Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports
Replace Supply
Cyan Cartridge
Magenta Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Black Cartridge
Cyan Imaging Unit
Magenta Imaging Unit
Yellow Imaging Unit
Black Imaging Unit
Separator Pick Assembly and Roller
Waste Toner Bottle
Fuser
Transfer Module
Maintenance Kit
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Weight
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
Universal Setup
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
Active NIC
Standard Network or Network [x]
1
Standard USB
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
SMTP Setup
Security Settings Help Manage Shortcuts
Edit Security Setups
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Confidential Print
Erase Temporary Data Files
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
E‑mail Settings
FTP Settings
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
E-mail Guide
Fax Guide
FTP Guide
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Copy Shortcuts
Profile Shortcuts
Option Card Menu
A list of installed download emulators (DLEs) appears.
2
1
Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
2
This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
Understanding the printer menus 129
Supplies menu
Menu item Description
Replace Supply
Separator Pick Assembly and Roller
Waste Toner Bottle
Lets you reset the supply counter for the separator pick
assembly and roller
• Select Yes to reset the supply counter.
• Select No to exit.
Cyan Cartridge
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Shows the status of the cyan toner cartridge
Magenta Cartridge
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Shows the status of the magenta toner cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Shows the status of the yellow toner cartridge
Understanding the printer menus 130
Menu item Description
Black Cartridge
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Shows the status of the black toner cartridge
Cyan Imaging Unit
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Shows the status of the cyan imaging unit
Magenta Imaging Unit
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Shows the status of the magenta imaging unit
Yellow Imaging Unit
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Shows the status of the yellow imaging unit
Black Imaging Unit
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Shows the status of the black imaging unit
Separator Pick Assembly and Roller
OK
Replace
Shows the status of the separator pick assembly and roller
Waste Toner Bottle
Near Full
Replace
Missing
OK
Shows the status of the waste toner bottle
Understanding the printer menus 131
Menu item Description
Fuser
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Shows the status of the fuser
Transfer Module
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Shows the status of the transfer module
Maintenance Kit
OK
Replace
Shows the status of the maintenance kit
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Menu item Description
Default Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP feeder to appear as a menu setting.
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When
one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Understanding the printer menus 132
Paper Size/Type menu
Menu item Description
Tray [x] Size
(LEF) Letter
Legal
JIS B4
A3
11 x 17
Universal
(LEF) A4
Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray
Notes:
• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
• For trays with automatic size sensing, only the size detected by the
hardware appears.
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size
and Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked.
When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Custom Type [x]
Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.
• If available, a user‑defined name appears instead of Custom Type [x].
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size
and Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked.
When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 133
Menu item Description
MP Feeder Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
JIS B4
A3
11 x 17
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette
for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Custom Type [x]
Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette
for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 134
Menu item Description
Manual Paper Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
JIS B4
A3
11 x 17
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Specifies the size of the paper loaded manually
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Custom Type [x]
Specifies the type of paper loaded manually
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Size
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specifies the size of the envelope loaded manually
Note: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 135
Menu item Description
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specifies the type of envelope loaded manually
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Configure MP menu
Menu item Description
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
• Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs.
• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.
Substitute Size menu
Menu item Description
Substitute Size
All Listed
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
11 x 17/A3
Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available
Notes:
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
• Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without a Change
Paper message appearing.
Paper Weight menu
Menu item Description
Plain Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the plain paper loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if card stock is supported.
Understanding the printer menus 136
Menu item Description
Transparency Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the transparencies loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Glossy Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Glossy Weight
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded
Note: Heavy is the factory default setting.
Labels Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the labels loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of vinyl labels loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the bond paper loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Envelope Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope Weight
Heavy
Light
Normal
Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded
Note: Heavy is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the letterhead loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 137
Menu item Description
Colored Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the colored paper loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Weight
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded
Note: Light is the factory default setting.
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded
Note: Heavy is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the cotton paper loaded
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper loaded
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.
Paper Loading menu
Use To
Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type.
Glossy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Glossy as the paper type.
Heavy Glossy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy Glossy as the paper type.
Vinyl Labels Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Vinyl Labels as the paper type.
Bond Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type.
Notes:
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
• Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.
Understanding the printer menus 138
Use To
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type.
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type.
Colored Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type.
Light Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Light as the paper type.
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type.
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom type is
supported.
Notes:
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
• Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.
Custom Types menu
Menu item Description
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom
Type [x] name or a user‑defined Custom Name created from the Embedded
Web Server or from MarkVision
TM
Professional
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Understanding the printer menus 139
Menu item Description
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Custom Names menu
Menu item Definition
Custom Name [x]
[none]
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces the Custom
Type [x] name in the printer menus.
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Menu item Description
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Width
1–11.69 inches (25–297 mm)
Height
1–17 inches (25–432 mm)
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
2 scans per side
Off
On
Specifies a custom scan size name, scan sizes, and options. The custom scan
size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.
Notes:
• 11.69 inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 297 millimeters
is the international factory default setting for Width.
• 17 inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 432 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Height.
• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.
Universal Setup menu
Menu item Description
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identifies the unit of measure
Note: Inches is the US factory default setting. Millimeters is the
international factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 140
Menu item Description
Portrait Width
3–48 inches
76–1219 mm
Sets the portrait width
Notes:
• 11.69 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be
increased in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 296.9 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters
can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
• If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
Portrait Height
3–48 inches
76–1219 mm
Sets the portrait height
Notes:
• 48 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in
0.01‑inch increments.
• 1219 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can
be increased in 1‑mm increments.
• If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specifies the feed direction
Notes:
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported by the tray.
Reports menu
Reports menu
Menu item Description
Menu Settings Page Prints a report on the current printer menu settings. The report also contains
information about the status of the supplies and a list of hardware options that
are successfully installed.
Device Statistics Prints a report containing printer statistics, such as supply information and details
about printed pages
Network Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers.
Understanding the printer menus 141
Menu item Description
Network [x] Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information
Notes:
• This menu item is available when there is more than one network option
installed.
• This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to
print servers.
Shortcut List Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts
Fax Job Log Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
Fax Call Log Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,
and blocked calls
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
Copy Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts
E‑mail Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts
Profiles List Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer
Print Fonts Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer
Print Directory Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer
hard disk
Notes:
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• Make sure that the flash memory card or hard disk is installed correctly
and working.
Print Demo Prints demo files that are available in the firmware, the flash option, and the disk
option
Asset Report Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned
into an asset database.
Understanding the printer menus 142
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Menu item Description
Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menus
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu; all inactive ports are omitted.
Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Auto
Off
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 143
Menu item Description
Network Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Sets the size of the network input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The value can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing. This menu
only appears if a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
Auto
On
Off
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Standard Network Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Displays and sets the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Understanding the printer menus 144
Network Reports menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network Setup > Reports or Network
Reports
Menu item Description
Print Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address
Network Card menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Menu item Description
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card
View Card Speed Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card
Network Address
UAA
LAA
Lets you view the network addresses
Job Timeout
0
10–225
Sets the amount of time in seconds before a network print job is canceled
Note: 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
Banner Page
Off
On
Allows the printer to print a banner page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers.
Menu item Description
Activate
On
Off
Activates TCP/IP
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Lets you set the current TCP/IP hostname
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus 145
Menu item Description
IP Address Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP address
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP netmask
Gateway Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP gateway
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
On
Off
Specifies the RARP address assignment setting
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIP
Yes
No
Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
Enables the built-in FTP server, which allows you to send files to the printer using File
Transfer Protocol.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
Enables the built-in web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer
can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address Lets you view or change the current WINS server address
Enable DDNS
Yes
No
Lets you view or change the current DDNS setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
Yes
No
Lets you view or change the current mDNS setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address Lets you view or change the current DNS server address
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No
Lets you view or change the current HTTPS setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Understanding the printer menus 146
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.
Menu item Description
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Enables IPv6 in the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
On
Off
Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6
address configuration entries provided by a router
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Lets you set the hostname
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
Enables DHCPv6 in the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.
Note: This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network.
The Wireless menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Menu item Description
WPS PBC Mode Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by pressing buttons on
both the printer and the access point (wireless router) within a given
period of time
WPS PIN Mode Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by using a PIN on the
printer and entering it into the wireless settings of the access point
WPS Auto Detect
Disable
Enable
Automatically detects the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses— WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) or WPS Personal
Identification Number (PIN)
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Network Mode
Ad hoc
Infrastructure
Specifies the network mode
Notes:
• Ad hoc is the factory default setting. This configures wireless
connection directly between the printer and a computer.
• Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access
point.
Understanding the printer menus 147
Menu item Description
Compatibility
802.11b/g/n
802.11n
802.11b/g
Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network
Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network
[list of available networks]
Lets you select an available network for the printer to use
View Signal Quality Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection
View Security Mode Lets you view the encryption method that a wireless network uses
Note: Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a simple and secure configuration that allows you to establish a wireless
network and enable network security without requiring prior knowledge of Wi‑Fi technology. It is no longer
necessary to configure the network name (SSID) and WEP key or WPA passphrase for network devices.
AppleTalk menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Menu item Description
Activate
Yes
No
Activates AppleTalk support
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
View Name Shows the assigned AppleTalk name
Note: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
View Address Shows the assigned AppleTalk address
Note: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Set Zone
[default]
[list of zones available on the network]
Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network
Note: When “default” is selected, the printer uses the AppleTalk zone that the
router identifies as the default zone for the network. If no default zone exists,
then the zone marked with an * is the default setting.
Standard USB menu
Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
Understanding the printer menus 148
Menu item Description
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Auto
On
Off
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
USB Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Disabled
Sets the size of the USB input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
Auto
On
Off
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
Understanding the printer menus 149
Menu item Description
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Sets the network address information for an external print server
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Sets the netmask information for an external print server
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Sets the gateway information for an external print server
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Parallel [x] menu
Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Auto
On
Off
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 150
Menu item Description
Parallel Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Disabled
Sets the size of the parallel input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Advanced Status
On
Off
Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• Off disables parallel port negotiation.
Protocol
Fastbytes
Standard
Specifies the parallel port protocol
Notes:
• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
• Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
Off
On
Determines if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
computer
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the
computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
Off
Determines if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a
strobe
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 151
Menu item Description
Mac Binary PS
Auto
On
Off
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Sets the network address information for an external print server
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Sets the netmask information for an external print server
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Sets the gateway information for an external print server
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Serial [x] menu
Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Understanding the printer menus 152
Menu item Description
NPA Mode
Auto
On
Off
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
• When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA
format, it is rejected as bad data.
• When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Serial Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Disabled
Sets the size of the serial input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the
printer hard disk.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR
Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port
Notes:
• DTR is the factory default setting.
• DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
• XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
• XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Understanding the printer menus 153
Menu item Description
Robust XON
Off
On
Determines whether the printer communicates availability to the computer
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Baud
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
1200
2400
4800
Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port
Notes:
• 9600 is the factory default setting.
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,
Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
Data Bits
8
7
Specifies the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Parity
None
Ignore
Even
Odd
Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Honor DSR
Off
On
Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses
DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical
noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to
print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.
SMTP Setup menu
Menu item Description
Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server gateway and port information
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
Understanding the printer menus 154
Menu item Description
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specifies a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Sets the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail
privileges
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specifies what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Device and User‑Initiated
E‑mail.
• Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP
server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
User‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Security menu
Editing Security Setups menu
Menu item Description
Edit Backup Password Creates a backup password
Note: This menu item will only appear if a backup password exists.
Understanding the printer menus 155
Menu item Description
Edit Building Blocks Edits the Internal Accounts, NTLM, various Setups, Password, and PIN
Edit Security Templates Adds or edits a Security Template
Edit Access Controls Controls access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Menu item Description
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out
Notes:
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1–10 attempts is the factory default setting.
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–60
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory
default setting. 1indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.
• “Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–
900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
• “Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–120 seconds.
10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
Access controls=”No Security”
No Effect
Reset factory security defaults
Changes the value of the security settings
Notes:
• Access controls=”No Security” retains all the security information that the user
has defined. “No Security" is the factory default setting.
• “No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the device’s security
configuration.
• “Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the
Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Web page.
Understanding the printer menus 156
Menu item Description
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never
Allows the user to request a server certificate
Notes:
• “Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is
provided or if no certificate is provided, the session is terminated immediately.
“Demand” is the factory default setting.
• “Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, the
session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, the session is
terminated immediately.
• “Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, it will be
ignored and the session proceeds normally.
• “Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16
Limits the digit length of the PIN.
Note: 4 is the is the factory default setting.
Confidential Print menu
Menu item Description
Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10
Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered
Notes:
• This menu appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
• Once the limit is reached, the print job for that user name and that PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Limits the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted
Notes:
• If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside on the
printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not
change to the new default value.
• If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs
Verify Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 157
Menu item Description
Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Erase Temporary Data Files menu
Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file
system. All permanent data on the hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
Use To
Wiping Mode
Off
Auto
Manual
Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multi‑pass
Specify a method for automatic disk wiping.
Notes:
• Single pass is the factory default setting.
• Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple pass
method.
Manual Method
Single pass
Multi‑pass
Specify a method for manual disk wiping.
Note: Single pass is the factory default setting.
Scheduled Method
Single pass
Multi‑pass
Specify a method for a scheduled disk wiping.
Note: Single pass is the factory default setting.
Security Audit Log menu
Menu item Description
Export Log Enables an authorized user to export the security log
Notes:
• To export the log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be
attached to the printer.
• From the Embedded Web Server, the log can be downloaded to a computer.
Understanding the printer menus 158
Menu item Description
Delete Log
Yes
No
Specifies whether audit logs are deleted
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Enable Remote Syslog
Remote Syslog Server
Remote Syslog Port
Remote Syslog Method
Remote Syslog Facility
Log full behavior
Admin’s e-mail address
Digitally sign exports
Severity of events to log
Remote Syslog non-logged
events
E-mail log cleared alert
E-mail log wrapped alert
E-mail % full alert
% full alert level
E-mail log exported alert
E-mail log settings changed alert
Log line endings
Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created
Note: Factory default settings enable the security audit log.
Set Date and Time menu
Menu item Description
Current Date and Time Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer
Manually Set Date and Time Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
Time Zone Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Automatically Observe DST
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.
Custom Time Zone Setup
DST Start Week
DST Start DayOff
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Offset
Enables the user to set up the time zone
Understanding the printer menus 159
Menu item Description
Enable NTP
On
Off
Enables Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network
Note: On is the factory default setting.
NTP Server Lets you view the NTP Server Address
Enable Authentication
Off
On
Lets you change the authentication setting to on or off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Menu item Description
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portugues
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Sets the language of the text appearing on the display
Note: Some languages may not be available for all printers.
Understanding the printer menus 160
Menu item Description
Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty media
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to
its factory default settings.
• Energy minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power, and of paper
and specialty media.
• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty
media needed for a print job. Performance may be
affected, but print quality is not.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Specifies whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. This setting supports
the performance specifications of your printer.
• On configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible. This setting is best suited for printing text and
line art.
• For optimal printing of color‑rich documents, set Quiet
Mode to Off.
• Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable
Quiet Mode. This setting will provide better print quality
and full speed printing.
Run Initial setup
Yes
No
Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard
Notes:
• Yes is the factory default setting.
• After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at
the country or region selection screen, the default
becomes No.
Understanding the printer menus 161
Menu item Description
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkish
Czech
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]
Specifies a language for the printer control panel virtual
keyboard
Paper Sizes
US
Metric
Specifies the default paper measurements
Notes:
• Initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.
• Changing this setting also changes the default for each
input source in the Paper Size/Type menu.
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]
Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers
separated by a semicolon.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 162
Menu item Description
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]
Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners
of the home screen
For the Left side and Right side menus, select from the
following options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:
• IP Address is the factory default setting for “Left side.”
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for “Right side.”
Displayed Information
[x] Toner
[x] Imaging Unit
Fuser
Transfer Module
Customize the displayed information for supplies.
For the [x] Toner, [x] Imaging Unit, Fuser, and Transfer Module
menus, choose from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to
Display.
Understanding the printer menus 163
Menu item Description
Displayed Information
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Specifies what is displayed for Waste Toner Bottle, Paper Jam,
Load Paper, and Service Errors. Available options for each
button are:
Display
No
Yes
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• No is the factory default setting for Display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to
Display.
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Lets you add or remove icons and buttons that appear on the
home screen
Available selections for each icon or button are:
Do not display
Display
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Specifies the format for the printer date
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Specifies the format for the printer time
Note: 12 hour is the factory default setting.
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel display
Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 164
Menu item Description
One Page Copy
Off
On
Sets copying from the scanner glass to only one page at a time
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Output Lighting
Normal/Standby Mode
Off
Dim
Bright
Sets the amount of light from the standard bin
Notes:
• Dim is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to
Energy or Energy/Paper.
• Bright is the factory default setting if Eco-Mode is set to
Paper or Off.
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
Off
Volume
1–10
Sets the audio volume for the buttons
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
• 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Tactile Touchscreen Feedback
On
Off
Provides touch screen sensation feedback
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Show Bookmarks
Yes
No
Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs
area
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Background Removal
On
Off
Specifies whether image background is removed in copy, fax,
e‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off
Lets you scan multiple documents into one file
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, the
Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific
jobs.
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level
Specifies how a scan job should be reloaded if a paper jam
occurs in the ADF
Notes:
• If Job level is selected, then the entire scan job must be
scanned again if a paper jam occurs.
• If Page level is selected, then only the jammed page
forward must be scanned again.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web
Server refreshes
Note: 120 seconds is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specifies a contact name for the printer
Note: The contact name will be stored on the Embedded
Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus 165
Menu item Description
Location Specifies the location of the printer
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator
intervention
Available options for each alarm type are:
Single
Continuous
Off
Notes:
• Single is the factory default setting. Single sounds three
quick beeps.
• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
• Off means no alarm will sound.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
1–240
Disabled
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system
enters a lower power state
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–240 min
Sets the amount of time the printer waits, after a print job is
finished, before it goes into a reduced power state
Notes:
• 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
• Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
• Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an
electrical circuit with room lighting.
• Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use.
Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready
to print with minimum warm‑up time.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
6 hours
1 day
2 days
3 days
1 week
2 weeks
1 month
Sets the amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate
mode
Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 166
Menu item Description
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300 sec
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
the printer displays Ready
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255 sec
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive
an end‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the
print job
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in
the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see
if any new print jobs are waiting.
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL
emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript
emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535 sec
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for
additional data before canceling a print job
Notes:
• 40 seconds is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL
emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255 sec
Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to process print jobs in the print queue
Notes:
• 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is
installed.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain
offline situations when not resolved within the specified time
period
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
Auto
On
Off
Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.
• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Understanding the printer menus 167
Menu item Description
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On
Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have
printed otherwise
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole
page.
• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that
the entire page prints.
Press Sleep Button
Sleep
Hibernate
Do Nothing
Determines how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep
button in idle state
Notes:
• Sleep is the factory default setting for Press Sleep
Button.
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
• If the printer is in Sleep Mode, then the touch screen
appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.
• Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button
on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode.
• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the touch
screen is completely off and the Sleep button turns
amber in color and blinks.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determines how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep
button when the printer is idle
Notes:
• Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
• If the printer is in Sleep Mode, then the touch screen
appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.
• Press and hold the Sleep button for 3 seconds or longer
to enter Hibernate mode.
• Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button
on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings
Notes:
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. It keeps
the user‑defined settings.
• Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads
stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not
affected.
Understanding the printer menus 168
Menu item Description
Export Compressed Log Files
Export
Exports compressed log files to a flash drive
Copy Settings menu
Menu item Description
Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Graphics
Specifies the content of the original document
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Black and White Laser
Specifies how the original document was produced
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
Off
Specifies whether copies are printed in color
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow color copies
On
Off
Lets you enable or disable color in copying
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• Off hides all color‑specific menus.
• This setting overrides the Color setting.
Auto Color Detect
Color Sensitivity
1–9
Area Sensitivity
1–9
Sets the amount of color the printer can detect from the original document
Note: This menu item is applicable only when Color is set to Auto.
Understanding the printer menus 169
Menu item Description
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specifies whether an original document is two‑sided or one-sided, and then specifies
whether the copy should be two‑sided or one-sided
Notes:
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side and the copied
page also has printing on one side.
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side while the copied
page has printing on both sides. For example, if the original document is six
sheets, the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides.
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides while the
copied page has printing on only one side. For example, if the original
document is three sheets with an image on each side of each sheet, then the
copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet.
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides and the copy
mimics the original exactly.
Paper Saver
Off
2 on 1 Portrait
2 on 1 Landscape
4 on 1 Portrait
4 on 1 Landscape
Allows copying two or four sheets of a document on one page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Print Page Borders
Off
On
Specifies whether a border is printed on the page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Collate
On [1,2,1,2,1,2]
Off [1,1,1,2,2,2]
Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 170
Menu item Description
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
ID Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A3
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
Specifies the paper size of the original document
Notes:
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
• A4 is the international factory default setting.
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Auto Size Match
Manual Feeder
Specifies the paper source for copy jobs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transparency Separators
On
Off
Places a sheet of paper between transparencies
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies the separator sheet source
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Number of Copies
1–999
Specifies the number of copies for the copy job
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 171
Menu item Description
Header/Footer
[Location]
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Specifies header/footer information and its location on the page
For the location, choose from the following options:
• Top left
• Top middle
• Top right
• Bottom left
• Bottom middle
• Bottom right
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for [Location].
• All pages is the factory default setting for “Print on.”
Overlay
Off
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Specifies the type of overlay printed on each page of the copy job
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Custom Overlay Specifies the custom overlay text
Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copies
On
Off
Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
Off
On
Lets you copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only if a valid printer hard drive is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Auto Center
Off
On
Lets you automatically center the content on the page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enables an equal balance of colors in the output
Understanding the printer menus 172
Menu item Description
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop and adjusts the dropout setting for each color threshold
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Specifies the contrast used for the copy job
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew Fix
Off
On
Corrects slight skew in the scanned image
Note: Off is the factory default setting
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a copy
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output
than the default, while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Sample Copy
Off
On
Creates a sample copy of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line.
Understanding the printer menus 173
General Fax Settings
Menu item Description
Restore Factory Defaults Restores the factory defaults of all fax settings
Optimize Fax Compatibility Optimizes fax compatibility with other fax machines
Fax Name or Station Name Specifies the name of the fax in the printer
Fax Number or Station Number Specifies the number assigned to the fax
Station ID
Fax Name or Station Name
Fax Number or Station Number
Specifies how the fax is identified
Enable Manual Fax
Off
On
Sets the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset
Notes:
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
• Touch #, and then 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax
function.
Memory Use
Equal
Mostly sent
All send
All receive
Mostly receive
Defines the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs
Notes:
• Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
• Mostly sent specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
• All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
• All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
• Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Specifies whether the printer cancels fax jobs
Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right
Specifies the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number
Note: The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask”
setting.
Digits to mask
0–58
Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number
Understanding the printer menus 174
Fax Cover
Menu item Description
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Configures the fax cover page
Notes:
• Off by default is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page.
• Off is the factory default setting for all other menu items.
Include To field
Off
On
Include From field
Off
On
From
Include Message field
Off
On
Message
Include Logo
Off
On
Include Footer [x]
Off
On
Footer [x]
Fax Send Settings
Menu item Description
Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print quality,
but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 175
Menu item Description
Original Size
Mixed Sizes
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A3
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
Specifies the paper size of the original document
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specifies the content of the original document
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Black and White Laser
Specifies how the original document was produced
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix Lets you enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]
Establishes a dialing prefix rule
Understanding the printer menus 176
Menu item Description
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial Frequency
1–200
Specifies the number of minutes between redials
Behind a PABX
No
Yes
Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone
Enable ECM
Yes
No
Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs
Enable Fax Scans
On
Off
Lets you fax files that are scanned at the printer
Driver to fax
Yes
No
Allows the print driver to send fax jobs
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Specifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse
Max Speed
33600
2400
4800
9600
14400
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent
Custom Job scanning
Off
On
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file
Scan Preview
Off
On
Specifies whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enables an equal balance of colors in the scanned image
Understanding the printer menus 177
Menu item Description
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop and adjusts the dropout setting for each color threshold
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Specifies the contrast in the scanned image
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew Fix
Off
On
Corrects slight skew in the scanned image
Note: Off is the factory default setting
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to faxing
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
0–5
Adjusts the sharpness of a fax
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output
than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Enable Color Fax Scans
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Enables color faxing
Note: Off by default is the factory default setting.
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono
Faxes
On
Off
Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 178
Fax Receive Settings
Menu item Description
Enable Fax Receive
On
Off
Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies
Removes fax jobs that request specific unavailable resources from the print queue
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Rings to Answer
1–25
Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto Reduction
On
Off
Scales an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
fax source
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multi‑Purpose Feeder
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming
fax
Sides (Duplex)
Off
On
Enables two-sided printing for incoming fax jobs
Separator Sheets
Off
Before Job
After Job
Enables the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies where the printer picks the separator sheet
Fax Footer
Off
On
Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
33600
2400
4800
9600
14400
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received
Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward
Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient
Understanding the printer menus 179
Menu item Description
Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF
Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded
Note: This menu is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Forward to Shortcut Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail,
FTP, LDSS, or eSF)
Block No Name Fax
Off
On
Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified
Banned Fax List Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Enables fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax Receive
On
Off
Enables the device to receive fax in color
Fax Log Settings
Menu item Description
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Enables printing of a receive error log following a received error
Auto Print Logs
On
Off
Enables automatic printing of fax logs
Note: Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies the source of the paper used for printing logs
Logs Display
Remote Fax Name or Remote
Station Name
Dialed Number
Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned
Understanding the printer menus 180
Menu item Description
Enable Job Log
On
Off
Enables access to the Fax Job log
Enable Call Log
On
Off
Enables access to the Fax Call log
Speaker Settings
Menu item Description
Speaker Mode
On until Connected
Always On
Always Off
Specifies the mode of the speaker.
Notes:
• On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the fax
connection is made.
• Always On turns the speaker on.
• Always Off turns the speaker off.
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Controls the volume setting
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Ringer Volume
On
Off
Controls the fax speaker ringer volume
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Answer On
Menu item Description
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
Specifies ring patterns when device is answering calls
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
Menu item Description
To Format Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen
Reply Address
Subject
Message
Understanding the printer menus 181
Menu item Description
SMTP Setup Specifies SMTP setup information
Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server port information
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
TIFF (.tif)
Specifies the image type for scan to fax
Content Type
Text
Text/Photo
Graphics
Photo
Specifies the content of the original document
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specifies how the original document was produced
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Fax Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Understanding the printer menus 182
Menu item Description
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A3
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
JIS B4
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enable Analog Receive
Off
On
Enables analog fax receive
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Settings menu
Menu item Description
E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
Specifies e‑mail server information
Notes:
• The subject is limited to 255 characters.
• The message is limited 512 characters.
Understanding the printer menus 183
Menu item Description
E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the sender
Note: Never appears is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB
Specifies the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes
Note: E-mails above the specified size are not sent.
E‑mail Server Setup
Size error message
Sends a message when an e-mail is larger than the configured size limit
E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
Specifies a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limits e‑mail
destinations to that domain name only
Notes:
• E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
• The limit is one domain.
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
Web Link
Defines the e‑mail server path name; for example: /directory/path
Note: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specifies the format of the scanned file
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure
Off
On
Searchable PDF
Off
On
Configures the PDF settings
Notes:
• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression.
• Off is the factory default setting for Secure and Searchable PDF. Secure
requires you to enter your password twice.
Understanding the printer menus 184
Menu item Description
Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Graphics
Specifies the content of the original document
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Black/White Laser
Specifies how the original document is produced
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
Off
Specifies whether copies are printed in color
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
75 dpi
Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 185
Menu item Description
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A3
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
Specifies the paper size of the original document
Notes:
• A4 is the international factory default setting.
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image
Notes:
• Best for content is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 186
Menu item Description
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Specifies how the images are sent
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specifies whether the transmission log prints
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies the paper source for printing e-mail logs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Enables the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
Off
On
Lets you copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
Off
On
Specifies whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Lets you save e-mail addresses as shortcuts
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
Destination screen.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enables an equal balance of colors in the output
Understanding the printer menus 187
Menu item Description
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop and adjusts the dropout setting for each color threshold
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Specifies the contrast of the output
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew Fix
Off
On
Corrects slight skew in the scanned image
Note: Off is the factory default setting
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output
than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Use cc:/bcc:
Off
On
Enables the use of the cc: and bcc: fields
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 188
FTP Settings menu
Menu item Description
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specifies the format of the FTP file
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure
Off
On
Searchable PDF
Off
On
Configures the PDF settings
Notes:
• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression.
• Off is the factory default setting for Secure and Searchable PDF. Secure
requires you to enter your password twice.
Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Graphics
Specifies the content of the original document
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Black and White Laser
Specifies how the original document was produced
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
Off
Specifies whether copies are printed in color
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 189
Menu item Description
Resolution
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
75 dpi
Specifies the quality of scanned images in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A3
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
Specifies the paper size of the original document
Notes:
• A4 is the international factory default setting.
• Letter is the U.S. factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 190
Menu item Description
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Notes:
• Best for content is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG
Specifies the format used in compressing TIFF files
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specifies whether to print the transmission log
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies a paper source when printing FTP logs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
FTP bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Custom Job Scanning
Off
On
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
Off
On
Specifies whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 191
Menu item Description
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enables an equal balance of colors in the output
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop and adjusts the dropout setting for each color threshold
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specifies the contrast of the output
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew Fix
Off
On
Corrects slight skew in the scanned image
Note: Off is the factory default setting
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a scanned image
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 192
Menu item Description
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output
than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Menu item Description
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specifies the format of the file to be sent through FTP
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
Off
On
Searchable PDF
Off
On
Configures the PDF settings
Notes:
• 1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
• Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression.
• Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF. Secure
PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Graphics
Specifies the content of the original document
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Black and White Laser
Specifies how the original document was produced
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 193
Menu item Description
Color
On
Off
Specifies whether copies are printed in color
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
75 dpi
Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi)
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A3
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
Specifies the paper size of the document
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on a page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 194
Menu item Description
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality
Notes:
• Best for content is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
5–90
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For
a multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu applies to all scan functions.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG
Specifies the format used in compressing TIFF files.
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.
Scan Bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Lets you enter a base file name
Note: A maximum of 53 characters is allowed.
Custom Job Scanning
Off
On
Lets you copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
Off
On
Specifies whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enables an equal balance of colors in the scanned image
Understanding the printer menus 195
Menu item Description
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop and adjusts the dropout setting for each color
threshold
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Specifies the contrast of the scanned image
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew Fix
Off
On
Corrects the slight skew on the scanned image
Note: Off is the factory default setting
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer
output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the
default.
Understanding the printer menus 196
Print Settings
Copies
1–999
Specifies a default number of copies for each print job
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Color
Color
Black Only
Specifies whether to print the document in color
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Collate
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specifies whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Defines the way two‑sided pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is
oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page
Notes:
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top
edge for landscape).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and
left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specifies the orientation of a multiple‑page document
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specifies that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that printed per side.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Prints a border on each page image
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 197
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specifies the positioning of multiple‑page images
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or
landscape orientation.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to
On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages,
such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is
useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document for
notes.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies the paper source for separator sheets
Notes:
• Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for Manual Feeder
to appear as a menu setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Setup menu
Menu item Description
Printer Language
PS Emulation
PCL Emulation
Sets the default printer language
Notes:
• PS Emulation is the factory default printer language.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.
Understanding the printer menus 198
Menu item Description
Job Waiting
Off
On
Specifies that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are
stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When
the missing information and/or options are obtained, the stored
jobs print.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a non-read‑only printer hard
disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs
are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Whole Page
Sets the logical and physical printable area
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
• Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary.
Whole Page only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e
interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages printed using
the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Printer Usage
Max Speed
Max Yield
Sets color toner use in printing
Notes:
• Max Speed is the default printer setting.
• The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting
Black Only Mode
Off
On
Sets the printer to print text and graphics using only the black print
cartridge
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Sets the storage location for downloads
Notes:
• RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in RAM
is temporary.
• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in
flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the
printer is turned off.
• This menu appears only when a flash and/or disk option is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus 199
Menu item Description
Resource Save
Off
On
Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives a job
that requires more memory than is available
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain
the downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are
deleted in order to process print jobs.
• On retains the downloads during language changes and
printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, then 38
Memory Full appears, and downloads are not deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All is selected
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always
appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed. The printer hard disk
cannot be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Menu item Description
Job Accounting Log
Off
On
Determines if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities Lets you print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive
Accounting Log Frequency
Monthly
Weekly
Determines how often a log file is created
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Determines how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full Level
1–99
Off
Specifies the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near
Full Action
Note: 5MB is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 200
Menu item Description
Disk Near Full Action
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determines how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting.
• The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Disk Full Action
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determines how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit
(100MB)
Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Determines where the printer posts job accounting logs
E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specifies the e‑mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs
Log File Prefix Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.
Finishing menu
Menu item Description
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specifies whether duplex (2‑sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobs
Notes:
• 1 sided is the factory default setting.
• You can set 2-sided printing from the software program. For Windows users,
click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the
print dialog and pop-up menus.
Understanding the printer menus 201
Menu item Description
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the
page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specifies a default number of copies for each print job
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.
• Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copies
menu setting.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted
between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page
2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a
document for notes.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specifies the paper source for separator sheets
Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 202
Menu item Description
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specifies that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print on each
page.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specifies the positioning of multiple‑page images
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specifies the orientation of a multiple‑page sheet
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Prints a border on each page image
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Quality menu
Use To
Print Mode
Color
Black Only
Specify whether to print images in color.
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Color Correction
Auto
Off
Manual
Adjust the color output on the printed page.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Print Resolution
1200 Image Q
Specify the printed output resolution.
Toner Darkness
1–5
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 203
Use To
Color Saver
On
Off
Reduce the amount of toner used for graphics and images.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On overrides the Toner Darkness setting.
RGB Brightness
‑6 to 6
Adjust the brightness of the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
RGB Contrast
0–5
Adjust the contrast of the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
RGB Saturation
0–5
Adjust saturation in color outputs.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan
‑5 to 5
Magenta
‑5 to 5
Yellow
‑5 to 5
Black
‑5 to 5
Reset Defaults
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Samples
sRGB Display
sRGB Vivid
Display—True Black
Vivid
Off—RGB
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off—CMYK
Print sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the
printer.
Manual Color
RGB Image
RGB Text
RGB Graphics
Customize the RGB color conversions.
Select from the following options:
Vivid
sRGB Display
Display—True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
Notes:
• sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image.
• sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics.
Understanding the printer menus 204
Use To
Manual Color (continued)
CMYK Image
CMYK Text
CMYK Graphics
Customize the CMYK color conversions.
Select from the following options:
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
Note: US CMYK is the U.S. factory default setting. Euro CMYK is the international
factory default setting.
Color Adjust Initiate a recalibration of color conversion tables and allow the printer to make
adjustments for color variations in output.
Spot Color Replacement Assign specific CMYK values to named spot colors.
Note: This menu is available only on the Embedded Web Server.
RGB Replacement Match the colors of the output with that of the original document.
Note: This menu is available only on the Embedded Web Server.
Utilities menu
Menu item Description
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk
Notes:
• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
affected.
• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Yes
No
Formats the flash memory
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
being formatted.
Notes:
• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option
card in the printer.
• A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating
properly for this menu item to be available.
• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Understanding the printer menus 205
Menu item Description
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Removes downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs
Notes:
• Delete Now configures the printer control panel to return to the originating
screen after the deletion process is completed.
• Do Not Delete sets the printer control panel to return to the main Utilities
menu.
Activate Hex Trace Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem
Notes:
• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn the printer off or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
XPS menu
Menu item Description
Print Error Pages
Off
On
Prints a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Menu item Description
Scale to Fit
No
Yes
Scales page content to fit the selected paper size
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Prints annotations in a PDF
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Menu item Description
Print PS Error
Off
On
Prints a page containing the PostScript error
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 206
Menu item Description
Lock PS Startup Mode
Off
On
Enables users to disable the SysStart file
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establishes the font search order
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting.
• This menu item is available only if a formatted flash memory option card
or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.
• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Image Smoothing
Off
On
Enhances the contrast and sharpness of low‑resolution images and smooths
their color transitions
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in
resolution.
PCL Emul menu
Menu item Description
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory default
set of fonts downloaded in RAM.
• Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option.
• The Flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write‑,
write‑, or password‑protected.
• Download shows all the fonts downloaded in RAM.
• All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10
Identifies a specific font and the option where it is stored
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for download.
Understanding the printer menus 207
Menu item Description
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specifies the symbol set for each font name
Notes:
• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emul Settings
Pitch
0.08–100
Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts
Notes:
• 10 is the factory default setting.
• Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
• Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
• For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but
cannot be changed.
PCL Emul Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page
Notes:
• Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emul Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
60
64
Specifies the number of lines that print on each page
Notes:
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired
Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emul Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Sets the printer to print on A4‑size paper
Notes:
• 198 mm is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of
eighty 10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emul Settings
Auto CR after LF
Off
On
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PCL Emul Settings
Auto LF after CR
Off
On
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 208
Menu item Description
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
Off
None
0–199
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays and feeders
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• None is not an available selection. It is only displayed when it is selected
by the PCL 5 interpreter. It also ignores the Select Paper Feed command.
• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
None
Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Returns all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings
Understanding the printer menus 209
HTML menu
Menu Item Description
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
Sets the default font for HTML documents
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
specify a font.
Menu item Description
Font Size
1–255 pt
Sets the default font size for HTML documents
Notes:
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scales the default font for HTML documents
Notes:
• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Sets the page orientation for HTML documents
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 210
Menu item Description
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Sets the page margin for HTML documents
Notes:
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Print
Do Not Print
Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Menu item Description
Auto Fit
On
Off
Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
for some images.
Invert
Off
On
Inverts bi‑tonal monochrome images
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Anchor Top Left
Scales the image to fit the selected paper size
Notes:
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Rev Portrait
Rev Landscape
Sets the image orientation
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 211
PictBridge menu
Menu item Description
Photo Size
Auto
L
2L
Hagaki Postcard
Card Size
100 x 150 mm
4 x 6 in
8 x 10 in
Letter
A4
A5
JIS B5
Controls the printed size of each photo printed from a PictBridge‑enabled device
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• If both the printer and the PictBridge‑enabled camera have a value for this
setting, the value in the camera supersedes the value in the printer.
Layout
Auto
Off
2 Up
3 Up
4 Up
6 Up
9 Up
12 Up
16 Up
Index Print
Determines the maximum number of images that can be printed on one side of paper
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• If both the printer and the PictBridge‑enabled camera have a value for this
setting, the value in the camera supersedes the value in the printer.
Quality
Normal
Draft
Fine
Determines which resolution, toner darkness, and color saver values the device uses
when printing photos sent from a PictBridge‑enabled device
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• If both the printer and the PictBridge‑enabled camera have a value for this
setting, the value in the camera supersedes the value in the printer.
Paper Source
MP Feeder
Tray [x]
Manual Paper
Identifies the printer default input source when printing photos from a
PictBridge‑enabled device
Notes:
• MP Feeder is the factory default setting.
• A photo size larger than the size of the media installed in the printer input
source cannot be selected.
Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They
contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.
Understanding the printer menus 212
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer.
Other translations are available on the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com.
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and about changing settings
E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or
the address book, and about changing settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies
Understanding the printer menus 213
Securing the memory before moving the printer
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings, information
from embedded solutions, and user data. The types of memory—along with the types of data stored by each—are
described below.
• Volatile memory—Your device utilizes standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data
during simple print and copy jobs.
• Non‑volatile memory—Your device may utilize two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND (flash
memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, scanner and
bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
• Hard disk memory—Some devices have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for
device‑specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print‑related. The hard
disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information, create folders, create disk or network file
shares, or FTP information directly from a client device. The hard disk can retain buffered user data from complex
scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
There are several circumstances under which you might wish to erase the contents of the memory devices installed in
your printer. A partial list includes:
• The printer is being decommissioned
• The printer hard drive is being replaced
• The printer is being moved to a different department or location
• The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization
• The printer is being removed from your premises for service
• The printer is being sold to another organization
Disposing of a hard drive
Note: Not all printers have a hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to ensure that confidential data stored on
the printer hard disk cannot be accessed once the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises. While
most data can be erased electronically, you may want to consider one or more of the following actions before disposing
of a printer or hard disk:
• Degaussing—Flushes the hard drive with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: While most data can be erased electronically, the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each memory device on which data could have been stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed on your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the
buffered data, simply power down the device.
Securing the memory before moving the printer 214
Erasing non‑volatile memory
• Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information
and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
• Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down and
6
MNO
while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3 Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will reboot several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords on the printer.
4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Notes:
• Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
• Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left
by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.
3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
Securing the memory before moving the printer 215
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.
3 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
• Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
Securing the memory before moving the printer 216
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Securing the memory before moving the printer 217
Maintaining the printer
Cleaning the exterior of the printer
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin.
3 Dampen a clean, lint‑free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the printer.
4 Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.
1
2
3
4
1 White underside of the ADF cover
2 White underside of the scanner cover
Maintaining the printer 218
3 Scanner glass
4 ADF glass
3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry.
4 Close the scanner cover.
Cleaning the ADF parts
Clean the ADF parts periodically to maintain optimal printing performance. Residue on the ADF parts may cause print
quality issues and false 28x paper jam messages.
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth with water.
3 Open the ADF cover.
1
4 Remove the pick roller assembly.
1
2
5 Wipe the surface of both pick rollers.
Maintaining the printer 219
6 Reinsert the pick roller assembly.
1
2
7 Wipe the entire surface under the ADF cover, including the two small white rollers.
8 Close the ADF cover.
Cleaning the printhead lenses
1 Open the front door.
Maintaining the printer 220
2 Turn the toner lock lever to the right and pull the toner cartridge out.
2
1
3 Remove the imaging unit:
a Open the internal cover.
b Push the imaging unit lock lever up and pull out the imaging unit.
1
Maintaining the printer 221
4 Locate the LED wipe at the end of the imaging unit. Make sure it is in the correct position.
5 Reinstall the imaging unit. When inserted into the printer, the LED wipe will rub across the row of LEDs, thus cleaning
the printhead lenses.
a Insert the imaging unit into the printer until it clicks into place.
Maintaining the printer 222
b Using both hands, push the sides of the internal cover firmly until the cover clicks into place.
2
2
1
6 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer and then turn the toner lock lever to the left.
2
1
7 Repeat step 2–6 to for all imaging units.
8 Close the front door.
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
• Direct sunlight
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
• High humidity above 80%
Maintaining the printer 223
• Salty air
• Corrosive gases
• Heavy dust
Checking the status of supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Device Status.
The Device Status page appears, displaying a summary of supply levels.
Ordering supplies
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies
dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com or contact the
place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Ordering toner cartridges
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low, or 88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low appears, order a
new cartridge.
When 88.2x Replace [color] cartridge appears, replace the specified cartridge.
Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19798 standard (with about 5% coverage per color). Extremely low
print coverage (less than 1.25% for a color) for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield for that color
and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.
Part name Part number
Black high‑yield toner cartridge X925H2KG
Cyan high‑yield toner cartridge X925H2CG
Magenta high‑yield toner cartridge X925H2MG
Maintaining the printer 224
Part name Part number
Yellow high‑yield toner cartridge X925H2YG
Ordering imaging units
When 84.xx [Color] imaging unit low, or 84.xx [Color] imaging unit nearly low appears,
order a replacement imaging unit.
When 84.xx Replace [color] imaging unit and [color] cartridge appears, replace the specified
imaging unit and toner cartridge.
Part name Part number
Black imaging unit C925X72G
Yellow imaging unit C925X75G
Magenta imaging unit C925X74G
Cyan imaging unit C925X73G
Ordering a fuser or a transfer module
When 80.xx Fuser life warning, 80.xx Fuser near life warning, or 83.xx Transfer
module life warning appears, order a replacement fuser or a transfer module.
When 80.xx Replace fuser or 83.xx Replace transfer module appears, install the new fuser or the
new transfer module. For installation information, see the documentation that came with the part.
Part name Part number
Fuser 40X6013 (110 volts)
40X6093 (220 volts)
Transfer module 40X6011
Ordering a waste toner bottle
When 82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full appears, order a replacement waste toner bottle.
When 82.xx Replace waste toner bottle appears, replace the waste toner bottle.
Note: Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended.
Part name Part number
Waste toner bottle C925X76G
Ordering ADF replacement parts
Order ADF replacement parts if you experience problems with paper double-feeding or failing to feed through the ADF.
Maintaining the printer 225
Part name Part number
ADF separator roll 40X6328
ADF pick roll 40X6327
Replacing supplies
Replacing an imaging unit
1 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the imaging units, do not leave the door open for more
than 10 minutes.
2 Open the internal cover.
3 Push the imaging unit lock lever up and pull out the imaging unit with the toner cartridge attached to it.
1
Maintaining the printer 226
4 Unpack the replacement imaging unit.
5 Peel off the black protective sheet and the toner sealing tape.
2
1
6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer until it clicks it into place.
7 Using both hands, push the sides of the internal cover firmly until the cover clicks into place.
2
2
1
8 Unpack the toner cartridge, and then shake it to redistribute the toner.
Maintaining the printer 227
9 Peel off the toner sealing tape.
10 Insert the toner cartridge and turn the lock lever to the left.
2
1
11 Close the front door.
Replacing a toner cartridge
1 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the imaging units, do not leave the door open for more
than 10 minutes.
Maintaining the printer 228
2 Turn the toner lock lever to the right and pull the toner cartridge out.
2
1
3 Unpack the toner cartridge, and then shake it to redistribute the toner.
4 Peel off the toner sealing tape.
Maintaining the printer 229
5 Insert the new cartridge into the printer and then turn the toner lock lever to the left.
2
1
6 Close the front door.
Replacing the waste toner bottle
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Open the front door.
Maintaining the printer 230
3 Open the internal cover.
4 Pull out the used waste toner bottle.
5 Unpack the new waste toner bottle.
6 Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer.
7 Using both hands, push the sides of the internal cover firmly until it clicks into place.
2
2
1
Maintaining the printer 231
8 Close the front door.
9 From the printer control panel, reset the Waste Toner Bottle counter in the Supplies menu.
Moving the printer
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Lift the printer off the optional tray, and then set it aside instead of trying to lift the tray and printer at the same
time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart
used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Maintaining the printer 232
Administrative support
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, go to the
Lexmark security Web page
or see the Embedded Web Server—Security: Administrator’s Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Using the Embedded Web Server
If the printer is installed on a network, then the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including:
• Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel
• Checking the status of the printer supplies
• Configuring printer settings
• Configuring network settings
• Viewing reports
To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Notes:
• If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page, and then locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Embedded Web Server correctly.
2 Press Enter.
Checking the virtual display
1 Open an Embedded Web Server associated with your printer.
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel, showing printer messages.
Checking the status of the printer
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Administrative support 233
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Device Status.
The device status shows the following:
• Paper tray settings
• Level of toner in the print cartridge
• Percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit
• Capacity measurements of certain printer parts
Setting up e‑mail alerts
You can have the printer send you an e‑mail when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed,
added, or when there is a paper jam.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items for notification, and type the e‑mail address to receive the alerts.
5 Click Submit.
Note: Contact your system support person to set up the e‑mail server.
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, the network, and supplies.
To view reports from a network printer:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings.
Administrative support 234
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit
Administrative support 235
Clearing jams
By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly, you can avoid most jams. If jams occur, follow the steps outlined
in this chapter.
If Jam Recovery is set to On, then the printer prints a new copy of the page that jammed. If Jam Recovery is set to Auto,
then the printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available.
Avoiding jams
Paper tray recommendations
• Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray.
• Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
• Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it prior to printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.
• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly
against the paper or envelopes.
• Push the tray in firmly after loading paper.
Paper recommendations
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex and straighten paper before loading it.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
• Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
• Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.
Understanding jam numbers and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears on the display. Open doors and covers and remove
trays to access jam locations. To resolve any paper jam message, you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path.
Clearing jams 236
4
5
1
2
3
6
7
Area Jam numbers What to do
1280‑289
1 Remove all paper from the ADF.
2 Flex and stack the paper.
3 Reload the ADF.
4 Adjust the paper guide.
5 Touch Continue, jam cleared.
2200‑201 Open the side cover, and then remove any jams.
3250
1 Remove all media from the multipurpose feeder.
2 Flex and stack the media.
3 Reload the multipurpose feeder.
4 Adjust the paper guide.
5 Touch Continue, jam cleared.
4 230–239 Open the side cover, lower the duplex unit, and then remove the jam.
524x Open each tray, and then remove any jams.
6203 Grasp any jammed paper visible in the standard exit bin.
7451 Open the scan cover, and then remove any jams.
Clearing jams 237
200 paper jam
1 Open the side door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2 Pull the jammed paper up and out to remove it from the paper path.
Notes:
• Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
• If the page is in the fuser, the fuser nip release lever should be lowered and should be switched to envelope
mode.
• After removing the jammed page, return the lever to the proper position.
3 Close the side door.
4 Touch Continue, jam cleared.
Clearing jams 238
201 paper jam
1 Open the side door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2 Determine where the jam is located, and then remove it:
a If the paper is visible under the fuser, then grasp it on each side and pull it out.
b If the paper is not visible, then you will need to remove the fuser unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the center of the fuser unit. Doing so will damage the fuser.
1 Lift the handles on each side of the fuser, and then pull to remove the fuser unit.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Notes:
• Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
• Pull the jammed paper downwards.
Clearing jams 239
• If the paper is in the fuser, then the fuser nip release lever should be lowered and should be switched
to envelope mode.
• After removing the jammed paper, return the lever to the proper position.
3 Align the fuser unit using the handles on each side, and then place it back into the printer.
3 Close the side door.
4 Touch Continue, jam cleared.
203 paper jam
1 Grasp any jammed paper visible in the standard exit bin, and then gently pull it out.
Notes:
• Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
• If the page is in the fuser, then the fuser nip release lever should be lowered and should be switched to
envelope mode.
• After removing the jammed page, return the lever to the proper position.
2 Touch Continue, jam cleared.
230 paper jam
1 Open the side door.
2 Hold onto the handles of the duplexing unit, open the cover, and then remove any jammed paper.
Clearing jams 240
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
3 Close the cover on the duplexing unit.
4 Close the side door.
5 Touch Continue, jam cleared.
231–239 paper jams
1 Open the side door.
2 Hold onto the handles of the duplexing unit, open the cover, and then remove any jammed paper.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clearing jams 241
3 Close the cover of the duplexing unit.
4 Close the side door.
5 Touch Continue, jam cleared.
24x paper jam
Paper jam in Tray 1
1 Check the side access door to trays and then pull the jammed pages out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 242
2 Open Tray 1, and then pull the jammed pages straight up and out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close Tray 1.
4 Touch Continue, jam cleared.
Paper jam in one of the optional trays
1 Check the side access door to trays and then pull the jammed pages out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 243
2 Open the specified tray, and then pull the jammed pages out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the tray.
4 Touch Continue, jam cleared.
Clearing jams 244
250 paper jam
1 Remove any jammed pages from the multipurpose feeder.
2 Load paper into the multipurpose feeder.
3 Touch Continue, jam cleared.
280–289 paper jams
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.
2 Open the ADF cover.
1
Clearing jams 245
3 Grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4 Close the ADF cover.
5 Reload original documents back into the ADF, straighten the stack, and then adjust the paper guide.
6 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
290–292 paper jams
290 paper jam
Close the ADF cover.
291 paper jam
Close the scanner glass cover.
292 paper jam
Try one of more of the following:
• Close the ADF cover.
• Close the scanner cover.
• Contact your system support system person.
451 paper jam
1 Open the scanner cover, and then remove any jammed paper.
2 Close the scanner cover.
3 Touch Continue, jam cleared.
Clearing jams 246
Troubleshooting
Solving basic printer problems
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
• Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
• The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
• All options are properly installed.
• The printer driver settings are correct.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on. This often fixes the problem.
Understanding the printer messages
Adjusting color
Wait for the process to complete.
An error has occurred with the USB drive. Please remove and reinsert drive.
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove and reinsert the flash drive.
• If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacement.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 247
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following
• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type]
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Close [tray] door
Close the specified tray door.
Troubleshooting 248
Close front or side door
Close the front or side door of the printer.
Disk corrupted
The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk, and the hard disk cannot be repaired. The hard
disk must be reformatted.
Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk.
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Disk problem
The printer hard disk must be reformatted.
Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device has been inserted. Remove the USB device, and then install a supported one.
Insert Tray [x]
Insert the specified tray into the printer.
Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the specified tray:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the specified tray.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
• Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 249
Load [src] with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
• Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default paper source.
• Cancel the print job.
Load [src] with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
• Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default paper source.
• Cancel the print job.
Load [src] with [size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
• Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it feeds from the default paper source.
• Cancel the print job.
Load [src] with [type] [size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
• Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it feeds from the default paper source.
• Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
• Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
• Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 250
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
• Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
• Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
• Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
• Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
• Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
• Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard output bin.
Replace separator pad
Install a new separator pad.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.
• Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.
Troubleshooting 251
Some held jobs were not restored
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.
Supply needed to complete job
A supply needed to complete the job is missing. Touch Cancel to clear the message.
Tray [x] paper size unsupported
The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported. Replace it with a supported paper size.
Unsupported disk
An unsupported disk has been inserted. Remove the unsupported disk, and then install a supported one.
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option
The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds, and then disables the download emulator on the firmware
card.
30.xx Missing [color] cartridge and/or [color] imaging unit
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove and reinstall the specified toner cartridge or imaging unit. For instructions on removing a toner cartridge
or imaging unit, touch More information.
• Install a new toner cartridge or imaging unit, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
31.xx Missing or defective [color] cartridge
Try one or more of the following:
1 Remove and reinstall the specified print cartridge.
For instructions on removing a print cartridge, touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message is not cleared, then replace the defective print cartridge.
32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by device
Remove the unsupported toner cartridge, and then install a supported one.
Troubleshooting 252
34 Incorrect paper size, open [src]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray.
• Confirm that the wheel on tray 1 is set to the paper size loaded in the tray. Make sure this size is the size you are
trying to print.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
• Check length and width guides of the tray and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
• Make sure the Print Properties or Print dialog settings have the correct paper size and type.
• Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the paper
is large enough for the data being printed.
• Cancel the print job.
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
• To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the
menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Ready appears, enable Resource Save.
• Install additional memory.
36 Printer service required
Touch Continue to clear the message or contact customer support.
37 Insufficient memory to collate job
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current print job.
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in printer memory.
• Install additional printer memory.
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Troubleshooting 253
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
38 Memory full
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message.
• Install additional printer memory.
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.
51 Defective flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
53 Unformatted flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.
54 Serial option [x] error
Try one or more of the following:
• Check that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port.
• Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer
and host computer.
Troubleshooting 254
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.
54 Standard network software error
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.
54 Network [x] software error
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer.
55 Unsupported option in slot [x]
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
56 Parallel port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Serial port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.
• Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
Troubleshooting 255
56 Standard parallel port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Standard USB port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 USB port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored
Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs. Possible changes include:
• The printer firmware has been updated.
• Paper input options needed for the print job were removed.
• The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port.
• The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
58 Input config error
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Check if all tray configurations are correct. Remove unnecessary trays if needed.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many disks installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Troubleshooting 256
3 Remove the excess disks.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many flash options installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many trays attached
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
61 Remove defective disk
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the defective printer hard disk.
• Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.
62 Disk full
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
80.xx Fuser near life warning
1 Order a replacement fuser immediately.
2 When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement
part.
3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 257
80.xx Fuser life warning
• Order a replacement fuser immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the
instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
80.xx Replace fuser
Replace the fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
80.xx Fuser missing
1 Replace the fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
82.xx Replace waste toner bottle
1 Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full
Order a replacement waste toner bottle immediately.
1 Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
83.xx Transfer module life warning
1 Replace the transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
83.xx Transfer module missing
Insert the transfer module into the printer.
83.xx Replace transfer module
Replace the transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
Troubleshooting 258
84 Defective [color] imaging unit
The specified imaging unit is either missing or not functioning properly. Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the specified imaging unit, and then reinstall it.
• Remove the specified imaging unit , and then install a new one.
84.xx [color] imaging unit nearly low
1 Order a replacement imaging unit.
2 When print quality is reduced, install the new imaging unit, following the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement part.
3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
84.xx [color] imaging unit low
1 Order a replacement imaging unit immediately.
2 When print quality is reduced, install the new imaging unit, following the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement part.
3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
84.xx Replace [color] imaging unit and [color] cartridge
1 Replace the imaging unit and color cartridge, following the instruction sheets that came with the replacement parts.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
84 Unsupported [color] imaging unit
Replace the specified imaging unit to continue printing.
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low
1 Order a replacement toner cartridge.
2 Remove the specified cartridge.
3 Firmly shake the cartridge side‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute the toner.
4 Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded, and then replace the cartridge.
88.xx [color] cartridge low
1 Order a replacement toner cartridge immediately.
2 Remove the specified cartridge.
Troubleshooting 259
3 Firmly shake the cartridge side‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute the toner.
4 Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded, and then replace the cartridge.
88.2x Replace [color] cartridge
The specified toner cartridge is empty.
1 Replace the specified toner cartridge.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Solving printing problems
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts.
1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2 Click the printer icon > Advanced > Print as image > OK > OK.
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
If Ready does not appear, then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.
Error message about reading USB drive appears
Make sure the flash drive is supported.
Print jobs do not print
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR PRINTER
From the printer control panel, check the status. If necessary, follow the recovery instructions.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT
Make sure Ready appears on the display before sending a print job.
CHECK IF A SUPPLY IS MISSING OR NEEDS REPLACEMENT
Remove and then reinstall or replace the supply.
Troubleshooting 260
CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL
Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin.
CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED
• Verify that you are using the correct printer software.
• If the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port, then make sure you are running a supported
operating system and using a compatible printer software.
MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY
• Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.
• Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected,
then check the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support
person to make sure the network is functioning correctly.
The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB, SERIAL, OR ETHERNET CABLE
For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
• Delete the print job, and then print it again.
• For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting
all jobs except the first one.
• For Windows users, open Print Properties. From the Print and Hold dialog, select the "Keep duplicate documents"
check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number.
• For Macintosh users, save each print job, naming each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the
printer.
Troubleshooting 261
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.
Print job takes longer than expected
Try one or more of the following:
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print
job.
TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off >
CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS
When using Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode settings, you may notice a reduction in performance.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the paper type and paper size settings.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
Incorrect characters print
• Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hex appears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace
mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.
• Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus.
Tray linking does not work
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER
• Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
• Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.
Troubleshooting 262
USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS
• Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
• If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: The standard 550-sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size. You
must set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Large jobs do not collate
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the job.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.
Unexpected page breaks occur
I
NCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
2 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears.
3 Touch Submit.
Solving copy problems
Copier does not respond
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
Troubleshooting 263
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
Scanner unit does not close
Make sure there are no obstructions:
1 Lift the scanner unit.
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
3 Lower the scanner unit.
Poor copy quality
These are some examples of poor copy quality:
• Blank pages
• Checkerboard pattern
• Distorted graphics or pictures
• Missing characters
• Faded print
• Dark print
• Skewed lines
• Smudges
• Streaks
• Unexpected characters
• White lines in print
Try one or more of the following:
CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES
Check the display and clear any error messages.
REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
When the print remains faded, replace the toner or print cartridge.
CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS
The scanner glass may be dirty. Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water.
For more information, see
“Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 218.
ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY
Adjust the toner darkness from the Copy menus.
Troubleshooting 264
MAKE SURE THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT IS SATISFACTORY
Check the quality of the original document.
PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE COPY SETTINGS
When patterns (moiré) appear in the output:
• On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being
scanned.
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > lower the Sharpness setting
• On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is being selected.
When the text is light or disappearing:
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Content > Text >
> select the appropriate source for the original document being copied >
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > increase the current setting
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal, and then reduce the current setting
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Contrast > increase the current setting
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting
When the output appears washed out or overexposed:
• On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being
scanned.
• From the Copy screen, adjust the Darkness setting.
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal > reduce the current setting
Partial document or photo copies
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Troubleshooting 265
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Solving scanner problems
Checking an unresponsive scanner
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:
• The printer is turned on.
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
• Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem
with the scanner.
Scan was not successful
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM
Turn off and then restart the computer.
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING
Close all programs not being used.
Troubleshooting 266
THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH
Select a lower scan resolution.
Poor scanned image quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on page 218.
ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Partial document or photo scans
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Troubleshooting 267
Cannot scan from a computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Solving fax problems
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e‑mail. To set up fax and e‑mail, follow these steps:
Note: Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network, make sure the fax cables are connected.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes > Submit
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on.
3 From the printer control panel, touch your language.
4 Touch your country or region, and then touch Continue.
5 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
6 Touch Fax and E‑mail to clear the icons, and then touch Continue.
Note: You can use these same steps to disable fax and e‑mail.
Caller ID is not shown
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to
determine which pattern or switch setting to use.
Troubleshooting 268
Cannot send or receive a fax
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:
• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine
CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK
1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services
can be used.
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface
port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN
provider.
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information,
contact your DSL provider.
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX.
If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE
• Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.
• If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending
a fax.
• If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.
Troubleshooting 269
TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.
CHECK FOR JAMS
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Ready appears.
TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.
VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice Mail
and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL
1 Dial the fax number.
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.
Can send but not receive faxes
Try one or more of the following:
LOAD PAPER
If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone rings before the printer answers. If you have extension
phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep
the Ring Delay setting at 4.
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Rings to Answer field, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers.
4 Click Submit.
Troubleshooting 270
REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the toner or print cartridge.
Can receive but not send faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.
THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left
corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY
• Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.
• As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.
Received fax has poor print quality
Try one or more of the following:
RESEND THE DOCUMENT
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
• Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
• Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.
• Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the prints appear faded, replace the cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
Troubleshooting 271
3 In the Max Speed box, click one of the following:
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
4 Click Submit.
Solving home screen application problems
An application error has occurred
C
HECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS
1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:
• View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings or Configuration.
3 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > System tab > Log.
4 From the Filter menu, select an application status.
5 From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.
MAKE SURE THE FILE NAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREADY IN USE
Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user.
To help prevent errors, make sure either “Append time stamp” or “Overwrite existing file” is selected in the
destination configuration settings.
ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS
In the destination configuration settings, lower the scan settings. For example, lower the scan resolution, disable
Color, or change the Content type to Text.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If you still cannot isolate the problem, then contact customer support.
Troubleshooting 272
Solving option problems
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
Try one or more of the following:
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER
1 Turn the printer off using the power switch.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not
listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option, or
go to
www.lexmark.com to view the option instruction sheet.
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED
From the computer you are printing from, select the option.
For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 53.
Paper tray problems
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1 Open the paper tray.
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3 Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
Troubleshooting 273
MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not
be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that
came with the paper tray, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com to view the paper tray instruction sheet.
Cannot detect flash memory card
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Cannot detect printer hard disk
Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS PORT (ISP) CONNECTIONS
Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the Internal Solutions (ISP) port.
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For information on installing the network printing software, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD.
Internal print server does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS
• Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board.
• Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For more information on installing the network printing software, do the following:
1 Open the Software and Documentation CD.
2 Click Additional.
3 Under Publications on this CD, select Networking Guide.
Troubleshooting 274
Memory card
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
CHECK THE USB/PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION
Make sure the USB/parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
Solving paper feed problems
Paper frequently jams
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty
media guidelines.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the
multipurpose feeder.
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
C
HECK THE PAPER PATH
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.
Troubleshooting 275
Jammed pages are not reprinted
T
URN ON JAM RECOVERY
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
2 Touch the arrows next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears.
3 Touch Submit.
Solving print quality problems
If these suggestions do not correct the problem, then contact customer support. You may have a printer part that
requires adjustment or replacement.
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the
software program.
Clipped images
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE GUIDES
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Troubleshooting 276
Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages
You may notice fine, horizontal lines in photographs or pages with a high concentration of color. This can occur when
the printer is in Quiet Mode. To fix this, set Quiet Mode to Off (Image/Photo).
Gray background
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING
Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:
• From the printer control panel Quality menu, change the setting.
• For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
Incorrect margins
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
Troubleshooting 277
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
A
BCDE
A
BCDE
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective toner cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE IMAGING UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective imaging unit.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the transfer module.
CLEAN THE PRINTHEAD LENSES
Remove and reinstall the imaging unit. The LED wipe at the end of the imaging unit will rub across the row of LEDs,
thus cleaning the printhead lenses.
Troubleshooting 278
Paper curl
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Print irregularities
Try one or more of the following:
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective toner cartridge.
Troubleshooting 279
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective transfer module. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement part.
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
Print is too dark
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting may be too dark, the Brightness setting may be too dark, or the Contrast setting may be
too high.
• Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users:
1 Choose File > Print.
2 From the Orientation pictures drop‑down menu, choose Printer Features.
3 Choose a lower value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
• From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
• For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.
Troubleshooting 280
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective toner cartridge.
Print is too light
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting may be too light, the Brightness setting may be too light, or the Contrast setting may be
too low.
• Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties
• For Macintosh users:
1 Choose File > Print.
2 From the Orientation pictures drop‑down menu, choose Printer Features.
3 Choose a higher value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
• From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
• For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.
MAKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print
cartridge.
1 Remove the toner cartridge.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
Troubleshooting 281
3 Reinsert the toner cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, replace the print cartridge.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective toner cartridge.
Printer is printing blank pages
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four
cartridges:
1 Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.
Repeating defects appear on a page
Cause Solution
) )
)
)
)
If marks occur repeatedly in only one color and multiple times on a page:
Troubleshooting 282
Cause Solution
The transfer module is defective. Replace the transfer module if the defects occur every:
• 38 mm (1.50 in.)
An imaging unit is defective. Replace the imaging unit if the defects occur every:
• 41.0 mm (1.61 in.)
• 75.0 mm (2.95 in.)
If marks occur down the page repeatedly in all colors:
The fuser is defective. Replace the fuser if the defects occur every:
• 141 mm (5.55 in.)
Shadow images appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
MAKE SURE THE IMAGING UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the imaging unit.
MAKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the toner
cartridge.
1 Remove the toner cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the toner cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, replace the toner cartridge.
Troubleshooting 283
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.
Skewed print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the length and width guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
• Make sure the guides are not too far from the paper stack.
• Make sure the guides are not pressing too lightly against the paper stack.
CHECK THE PAPER
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.
Solid color pages
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE IMAGING UNIT IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY AND IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Remove and then reinstall the imaging unit. If the problem continues, the imaging unit may need to be replaced.
MAKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY, ARE NOT DEFECTIVE AND NOT LOW ON
TONER
• Remove and reinstall the toner cartridges.
• Make sure toner is distributed evenly within the toner cartridge:
1 Remove the toner cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the
print quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the toner cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, replace the toner cartridge.
• If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.
Troubleshooting 284
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER
• From the printer control panel Paper Menu, select Default Source.
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn, defective, or empty toner cartridge.
CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clear any paper you see or clean any visible toner from the paper path. If the problem persists, then contact Customer
Support.
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER
• From the printer control panel Paper menu, select Default Source
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
Troubleshooting 285
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn, defective, or empty toner cartridge.
CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Check the paper path around the toner cartridge.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clear any paper you see.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page
Cause Solution
Toner cartridge may be defective or installed incorrectly. Reinstall or replace the toner cartridge.
Transfer module may be worn or defective. Replace the transfer module.
Imaging unit may be worn or defective. Replace the imaging unit.
Fuser may be worn or defective. Replace the fuser.
Toner may be in the paper path. Call for service.
Printer may not have recalibrated recently. Perform color adjust from the Quality menu.
Application may specify an off‑white background. Check the application.
Toner rubs off
Cause Solution
Specialty media is being used. Make sure the correct Paper Type is selected.
The Paper Weight setting in the Paper Menu is
wrong for the type of paper being used.
Change the Paper Weight from Normal to Heavy. If necessary, change
Paper Texture from Normal to Rough.
Fuser is worn or defective. Replace the fuser.
Fuser is in envelope mode. Open the side door. Make sure that the green lever on the left side of
the fuser is not in envelope mode.
Toner specks
Cause Solution
Toner cartridges may be worn or defective. Replace the defective or worn cartridges.
Toner is in the paper path. Call for service.
The imaging unit may be defective. Replace the defective imaging unit.
Troubleshooting 286
Transparency print quality is poor
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES
Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Uneven print density
ABCDE
A
BCDE
A
BCDE
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE OR WORN TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective toner cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE IMAGING UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective imaging unit.
Solving color quality problems
FAQ about color printing
What is RGB color?
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in
nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create
colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue
needed to produce a certain color.
Troubleshooting 287
What is CMYK color?
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (known as CMYK color) inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce
a large range of colors observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing
presses, inkjet printers, and color laser/LED printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing
colors by indicating the amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.
How is color specified in a document to be printed?
Software applications typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they
commonly let you modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software application
Help section.
How does the printer know what color to print?
When you print a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The color
information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of cyan,
magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object type information lets different
color conversion tables be used for different types of objects. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color
conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.
Should I use PostScript or PCL emulation printer software? What settings should I use for the best color?
The PostScript driver is strongly recommended for best color quality. The default settings in the PostScript driver
provide preferred color quality for the majority of printouts.
Why doesn't the printed color match the color that I see on the computer screen?
The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard
computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there are
many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions. For recommendations on how
the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color‑matching problems, see the question, “How
can I match a particular color (such as a color in a corporate logo)?”
The printed page appears tinted. Can I slightly adjust the color?
Sometimes you may consider printed pages to appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red).
This can be caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these
instances, adjusting the Color Balance setting may create more preferable color. Color Balance lets you make subtle
adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive (or negative) values for cyan,
magenta, yellow, and black under the Color Balance menu will slightly increase (or decrease) the amount of toner
used for the chosen color. For example, if you believe the overall printed page to be too red, then decreasing both
magenta and yellow could potentially improve color.
My color transparencies seem dark when being projected. Is there anything I can do to improve the color?
This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain
the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective projector
must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency.
Make sure to print on the recommended type of color transparencies. For more information about the paper and
media specifications, see the User's Guide on the Software and Documentation CD.
What is manual color correction?
The color conversion tables applied to each object when using the default Auto Color Correction setting generate
preferred color for the majority of documents. Occasionally, you may want to apply a different color table mapping.
This customization is accomplished using the Manual Color menu and the Manual Color Correction setting.
Troubleshooting 288
Manual Color Correction applies to RGB and CMYK color conversion table mappings as defined in the Manual Color
menu.
You can select any of the different color conversion tables for RGB or CMYK:
Color conversion table Settings
RGB
• sRGB Display
• Display–True Black
• sRGB Vivid
• Vivid
• Off
CMYK
• US CMYK
• Euro CMYK
• Vivid CMYK
• Off
Note: The Manual Color Correction setting is not useful if the software application does not specify colors with
RGB or CMYK combinations. It is also not effective in situations where the software application or the computer
operating system controls the adjustment of colors.
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?
Occasionally, you may have a need for the printed color of a particular object to closely match a specific color. For
example, you may need to match the color of a corporate logo. While instances can occur in which the printer cannot
exactly reproduce the desired color, you should be able to identify adequate color matches for the majority of cases.
The Color Samples menu item can provide useful information in helping solve this particular type of color‑matching
problem. The nine Color Samples values correspond to color conversion tables in the printer. Selecting any of the
Color Samples values generates a multiple‑page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or
RGB combination is located on each box, depending on the table selected. The observed color of each box is obtained
by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table.
You can examine the color samples pages and identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color. The
color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software application.
For instructions, see the software application Help. Manual Color Correction may be necessary to utilize the selected
color conversion table for the particular object.
Selecting which Color Samples pages to use for a particular color‑matching problem depends on the Color Correction
setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the
color of the object is specified in the software application (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the printer Color
Correction setting is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information; no color conversion is implemented.
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software application does not specify colors with RGB or
CMYK combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist where the software application or the computer
operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the application through color management.
The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.
The following table can help identify which Color Sample pages to use for color matching.
Troubleshooting 289
Color specification and object to be
printed
Color Correction setting Sample pages to use
RGB—Text Auto sRGB Vivid
Manual Manual Color RGB Text Setting
RGB—Graphic Auto sRGB Vivid
Manual Manual Color RGB Graphic Setting
RGB—Image Auto sRGB Display
Manual Manual Color RGB Image Setting
CMYK—Text Auto US CMYK or Euro CMYK
Manual Manual Color CMYK Text Setting
CMYK—Graphic Auto US CMYK
Manual Manual Color CMYK Graphic Setting
CMYK—Image Auto US CMYK
Manual Manual Color CMYK Image Setting
What are Detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?
These pages require the use of the Embedded Web Server. The Embedded Web Server is a series of resident pages
stored in the network printer firmware. To access these pages, browse to the IP address of the network printer. Click
Configuration Menu, and then click Detailed Color Samples.
For more information about using the Embedded Web Server, see the User's Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD.
Detailed Color Samples are pages similar to the default pages of color samples accessible from the Quality menu
using the printer control panel. The default color samples available using this method have an increment value of
10% for red, green, and blue. If you find a value on this page that is close, but would like to scan more colors in a
nearby area, then you can use the Detailed Color Samples to select the desired color values and a more specific
increment. This provides a way to print multiple pages of colored boxes that surround a specific color of interest.
There are nine conversion tables available with the following three options:
• Print—Prints the default pages
• Detailed—Lets you enter individual red, green, and blue values and a specific increment of color
• Reset—Lets you clear the existing information and enter new values
The process can be duplicated for Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Black (K) color conversion tables, too.
Collectively, these values are known as CMYK color. The default increment is 10% for Black and 20% each for Cyan,
Magenta, and Yellow.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.
Troubleshooting 290
CHECK THE ADDRESS ENTERED IN THE WEB BROWSER
• Depending on the network settings, you may need to type “https://” instead of “http://” before the printer
IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support person.
• Make sure printer IP address is correct.
TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server. For
more information, contact your system support person.
Contacting customer support
When you call customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
In the U.S. or Canada, call 1‑800‑539‑6275. For other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 291
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark X925, XS925
Machine type:
7541
Model(s):
032, 036, 096
Edition notice
October 2014
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit
www.lexmark.com.
© 2014 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices 292
Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in
the United States and/or other countries.
PrintCryption, ScanBack, and StapleSmart are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation
Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford Arthur Baker
Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Taffy Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Notices 293
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.
Modular component notice
This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX‑M01‑003: FCC ID: IYLM01003; IC: 2376A‑M01003
Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX-M05-001: FCC ID: IYLLEXM05001; IC: 2376A-M05001
Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX-M05-002: FCC ID: IYLLEXM05002; IC: 2376A-M05002
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 53 (one-sided), 55 (two-sided)
Scanning 54
Copying 54
Notices 294
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Ready 39
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com for your local
sales office phone number.
India E-Waste notice
This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011, which prohibit use of lead,
mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations
exceeding 0.1％ by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in Schedule II of the Rules.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.
Notices 295
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.
Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping temperature -40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
Storage temperature and relative humidity 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
8 to 80% RH
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode Description Power consumption
(Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs. 623
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original documents. 632
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. 156
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 135
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 25.9
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 5
Notices 296
Mode Description Power consumption
(Watts)
Off The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned off. 0
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See
www.lexmark.com for current values.
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 5
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes. Setting
the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate
Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
• Using the Hibernate Timeout
• Using the Schedule Power modes
• Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between
one hour and one month.
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.
Notices 297
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC
on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements
of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
Notices 298
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at
www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
Notices 299
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any line
which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all
analog telephone lines in Switzerland.
Notices 300
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 14B5109 ou
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé
pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
14B5109 oder 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden.
Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877) da installare su tutte le
linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poiché gli impulsi remoti sono
presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.
Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.
Notices 301
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.
Notices 302
Notice to users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE
EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT
LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT
RO SE SI SK TR UK
Česky Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.
Notices 303
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħ
rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Notices 304
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-
specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark
products will not be impacted.
Notices 305
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.
Notices 306
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
LEXMARK SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT: BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE
PRODUCT UNUSED AND REQUEST A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT YOU PAID. IF YOU ARE INSTALLING THIS PRODUCT FOR
USE BY OTHER PARTIES, YOU AGREE TO INFORM THE USERS THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF
THESE TERMS.
LEXMARK SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
This License Agreement (“Software License Agreement”) is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a
single entity) and Lexmark International, Inc. (“Lexmark”) that, to the extent your Lexmark product or Software Program
is not otherwise subject to a written software license agreement between you and Lexmark or its suppliers, governs
your use of any Software Program installed on or provided by Lexmark for use in connection with your Lexmark product.
The term “Software Program” includes machine-readable instructions, audio/visual content (such as images and
recordings), and associated media, printed materials and electronic documentation, whether incorporated into,
distributed with or for use with your Lexmark product.
1 STATEMENT OF SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY. Lexmark warrants that the media (e.g., diskette or compact disk)
on which the Software Program (if any) is furnished is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal
use during the warranty period. The warranty period is ninety (90) days and commences on the date the Software
Program is delivered to the original end-user. This limited warranty applies only to Software Program media
purchased new from Lexmark or an Authorized Lexmark Reseller or Distributor. Lexmark will replace the Software
Program should it be determined that the media does not conform to this limited warranty.
2 DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, LEXMARK AND ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE
SOFTWARE PROGRAM "AS IS" AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ABSENCE OF VIRUSES, ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM. TO THE
EXTENT LEXMARK CANNOT BY LAW DISCLAIM ANY COMPONENT OF THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, LEXMARK LIMITS THE DURATION OF SUCH
WARRANTIES TO THE 90-DAY TERM OF THE EXPRESS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY.
This Agreement is to be read in conjunction with certain statutory provisions, as that may be in force from time to
time, that imply warranties or conditions or impose obligations on Lexmark that cannot be excluded or modified.
If any such provisions apply, then to the extent Lexmark is able, Lexmark hereby limits its liability for breach of those
provisions to one of the following: providing you a replacement copy of the Software Program or reimbursement
of the price paid for the Software Program.
The Software Program may include internet links to other software applications and/or internet web pages hosted
and operated by third parties unaffiliated with Lexmark. You acknowledge and agree that Lexmark is not responsible
in any way for the hosting, performance, operation, maintenance, or content of, such software applications and/or
internet web pages.
3 LIMITATION OF REMEDY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY AND ALL LIABILITY OF
LEXMARK UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF THE PRICE PAID
Notices 307
FOR THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND FIVE U.S. DOLLARS (OR THE EQUIVALENT IN LOCAL CURRENCY). YOUR SOLE
REMEDY AGAINST LEXMARK IN ANY DISPUTE UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE TO SEEK TO
RECOVER ONE OF THESE AMOUNTS, UPON PAYMENT OF WHICH LEXMARK SHALL BE RELEASED AND DISCHARGED
OF ALL FURTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITY TO YOU.
IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK, ITS SUPPLIERS, SUBSIDIARIES, OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
INDIRECT, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS
OR REVENUES, LOST SAVINGS, INTERRUPTION OF USE OR ANY LOSS OF, INACCURACY IN, OR DAMAGE TO, DATA
OR RECORDS, FOR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, OR DAMAGE TO REAL OR TANGIBLE PROPERTY, FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY
ARISING OUT OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM, OR
OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT), REGARDLESS OF
THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY), AND EVEN IF LEXMARK, OR ITS SUPPLIERS, AFFILIATES, OR
REMARKETERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED
ON A THIRD-PARTY CLAIM, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THIS EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES IS DETERMINED LEGALLY INVALID.
THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE-STATED REMEDIES FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
4 U.S.A. STATE LAWS. This Software Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights
that vary from state to state. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the
exclusion of limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.
5 LICENSE GRANT. Lexmark grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this
License Agreement:
a Use. You may Use one (1) copy of the Software Program. The term “Use” means storing, loading, installing,
executing, or displaying the Software Program. If Lexmark has licensed the Software Program to you for
concurrent use, you must limit the number of authorized users to the number specified in your agreement with
Lexmark. You may not separate the components of the Software Program for use on more than one computer.
You agree that you will not Use the Software Program, in whole or in part, in any manner that has the effect of
overriding, modifying, eliminating, obscuring, altering or de-emphasizing the visual appearance of any
trademark, trade name, trade dress or intellectual property notice that appears on any computer display screens
normally generated by, or as a result of, the Software Program.
b Copying. You may make one (1) copy of the Software Program solely for purposes of backup, archiving, or
installation, provided the copy contains all of the original Software Program’s proprietary notices. You may not
copy the Software Program to any public or distributed network.
c Reservation of Rights. The Software Program, including all fonts, is copyrighted and owned by Lexmark
International, Inc. and/or its suppliers. Lexmark reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this License
Agreement.
d Freeware. Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, all or any portion of the
Software Program that constitutes software provided under public license by third parties (“Freeware”) is
licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the software license agreement accompanying such
Freeware, whether in the form of a discrete agreement, shrink-wrap license, or electronic license terms at the
time of download. Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed entirely by the terms and conditions of such
license.
6 TRANSFER. You may transfer the Software Program to another end-user. Any transfer must include all software
components, media, printed materials, and this License Agreement and you may not retain copies of the Software
Program or components thereof. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the
transfer, the end-user receiving the transferred Software Program must agree to all these License Agreement terms.
Upon transfer of the Software Program, your license is automatically terminated. You may not rent, sublicense, or
assign the Software Program except to the extent provided in this License Agreement, and any attempt to do so
shall be void.
7 UPGRADES. To Use a Software Program identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed to the original Software
Program identified by Lexmark as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the original
Software Program that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.
Notices 308
8 LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not alter, decrypt, reverse engineer, reverse assemble, reverse
compile or otherwise translate the Software Program, except as and to the extent expressly permitted to do so by
applicable law for the purposes of inter-operability, error correction, and security testing. If you have such statutory
rights, you will notify Lexmark in writing of any intended reverse engineering, reverse assembly, or reverse
compilation. You may not decrypt the Software Program unless necessary for the legitimate Use of the Software
Program.
9 ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE. This License Agreement applies to updates or supplements to the original Software
Program provided by Lexmark unless Lexmark provides other terms along with the update or supplement.
10 TERM. This License Agreement is effective unless terminated or rejected. You may reject or terminate this license
at any time by destroying all copies of the Software Program, together with all modifications, documentation, and
merged portions in any form, or as otherwise described herein. Lexmark may terminate your license upon notice
if you fail to comply with any of the terms of this License Agreement. Upon such termination, you agree to destroy
all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications, documentation, and merged portions in any
form.
11 TAXES. You agree that you are responsible for payment of any taxes including, without limitation, any goods and
services and personal property taxes, resulting from this Agreement or your Use of the Software Program.
12 LIMITATION ON ACTIONS. No action, regardless of form, arising out of this Agreement may be brought by either
party more than two years after the cause of action has arisen, except as provided under applicable law.
13 APPLICABLE LAW. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Kentucky, United States of
America. No choice of law rules in any jurisdiction shall apply. The UN Convention on Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods shall not apply.
14 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Program has been developed entirely at private
expense. Rights of the United States Government to use the Software Program is as set forth in this Agreement and
as restricted in DFARS 252.227-7014 and in similar FAR provisions (or any equivalent agency regulation or contract
clause).
15 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Lexmark, its affiliates, and agents may collect and use information you
provide in relation to support services performed with respect to the Software Program and requested by you.
Lexmark agrees not to use this information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary
to provide such services.
16 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You may not (a) acquire, ship, transfer, or reexport, directly or indirectly, the Software
Program or any direct product therefrom, in violation of any applicable export laws or (b) permit the Software
Program to be used for any purpose prohibited by such export laws, including, without limitation, nuclear, chemical,
or biological weapons proliferation.
17 AGREEMENT TO CONTRACT ELECTRONICALLY. You and Lexmark agree to form this License Agreement
electronically. This means that when you click the “Agree” or “Yes” button on this page or use this product, you
acknowledge your agreement to these License Agreement terms and conditions and that you are doing so with the
intent to “sign” a contract with Lexmark.
18 CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT. You represent that you are of the legal age of majority in the place you
sign this License Agreement and, if applicable, you are duly authorized by your employer or principal to enter into
this contract.
19 ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This License Agreement (including any addendum or amendment to this License Agreement
that is included with the Software Program) is the entire agreement between you and Lexmark relating to the
Software Program. Except as otherwise provided for herein, these terms and conditions supersede all prior or
contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals, and representations with respect to the Software
Program or any other subject matter covered by this License Agreement (except to the extent such extraneous
terms do not conflict with the terms of this License Agreement, any other written agreement signed by you and
Lexmark relating to your Use of the Software Program). To the extent any Lexmark policies or programs for support
services conflict with the terms of this License Agreement, the terms of this License Agreement shall control.
Notices 309
MICROSOFT CORPORATION NOTICES
1 This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions
upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369.
2 This product is based on Microsoft Print Schema technology. You may find the terms and conditions upon which
Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property at
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=83288.
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.
Notices 310
Index
Numerics
1565 Emulation error, load
emulation option 252
200 paper jam 238
201 paper jam 239
203 paper jam 240
230 paper jam 240
231–239 paper jams 241
24x paper jam 242
250 paper jam 245
280–289 paper jam 245
290–292 paper jams 246
30.xx Missing [color] cartridge
and/or [color] imaging unit 252
31.xx Missing or Defective [color]
cartridge 252
32.xx [color] cartridge part number
unsupported by device 252
34 Incorrect paper size, open
[src] 253
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 253
36 Printer service required 253
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
operation 253
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 253
37 Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted 253
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 254
38 Memory full 254
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 254
451 paper jam 246
51 Defective flash detected 254
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 254
53 Unformatted flash detected 254
54 Network [x] software error 255
54 Serial option [x] error 254
54 Standard network software
error 255
55 Unsupported option in slot
[x] 255
550‑sheet tray (standard or
optional)
loading 68
550‑sheet tray and printer stand
installing 38
550‑sheet tray, optional
installing 45
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 255
56 Serial port [x] disabled 255
56 Standard parallel port
disabled 256
56 Standard USB port disabled 256
56 USB port [x] disabled 256
57 Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored 256
58 Input config error 256
58 Too many disks installed 256
58 Too many flash options
installed 257
58 Too many trays attached 257
61 Remove defective disk 257
62 Disk full 257
80.xx Fuser life warning 258
80.xx Fuser missing 258
80.xx Fuser near life warning 257
80.xx Replace fuser 258
82.xx Replace waste toner
bottle 258
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly
full 258
83.xx Replace transfer module 258
83.xx Transfer module life
warning 258
83.xx Transfer module missing 258
84 Defective [color] imaging
unit 259
84 unsupported [color] imaging
unit 259
84.xx [color] imaging unit low 259
84.xx [color] imaging unit nearly
low 259
84.xx Replace [color] imaging unit
and [color] cartridge 259
88.2x Replace [color] cartridge 260
88.xx [color] cartridge low 259
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly
low 259
A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 22
accessing the system board 27
Active NIC menu 143
adding a date and time stamp 98
adding hardware options
print driver 53
ADF
copying using 92
ADF parts
cleaning 219
ADF pick roll
ordering 225
ADF separator roll
ordering 225
Adjusting color 247
adjusting copy quality 95
adjusting printer display
brightness 65
adjusting Sleep mode 64
adjusting toner darkness 83
advanced options
copying 101
e‑mailing 107
faxing 119
FTP 128
AppleTalk menu 148
attaching cables 52
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
using 14
available internal options 27
avoiding jams 79
avoiding paper jams 236
B
black‑and‑white printing 83
blank pages 282
blocking junk faxes 117
buttons, printer control panel 15
buttons, touch screen
using 18
C
cables
Ethernet 52
USB 52
Index 311
calling customer support 291
canceling
print job, from computer 91
canceling a print job
from a computer 91
from the printer control panel 90
canceling an e-mail 105
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 290
card stock
loading in multipurpose feeder 72
tips 88
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 248
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 248
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 247
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load [orientation] 248
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] [paper type] 248
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] [paper type] load
[orientation] 248
changing output file type
e‑mailing 105
checking an unresponsive
printer 247
checking an unresponsive
scanner 266
checking printer status
on Embedded Web Server 233
checking printer status using the
Embedded Web Server 233
checking status of supplies 224
checking the status of supplies 224
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 233
checking virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 233
cleaning
ADF parts 219
exterior of the printer 218
scanner glass 218
cleaning the printhead lenses 220
Close [tray] door 248
Close front or side door 249
collating copies 96
confidential data
information on securing 233
confidential print jobs 88
printing from a Macintosh
computer 89
printing from Windows 89
Confidential Print menu 157
configuration information
wireless network 55
configurations
printer 11
Configure MP menu 136
configuring e‑mail settings 102
configuring port settings 60
connecting the printer to
regional adapters 111
connecting to distinctive ring
service 111
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 65
conserving supplies 62
Eco‑Mode 63
Quiet Mode 63
Sleep Mode 64
standard exit bin lighting 65
conserving supplies 62
contacting customer support 291
control panel, printer 15
copy quality
adjusting 95
copy screen
options 99, 100, 101, 127
Copy Settings menu 169
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 263
partial document or photo
copies 265
poor copy quality 264
poor scanned image quality 267
scanner unit does not close 264
copying
adding a date and time stamp 98
adding an overlay message 98
adjusting quality 95
advanced options 101
canceling a copy job 99
collating copies 96
custom job (job build) 97
different paper sizes 94
enlarging 95
multiple pages on one sheet 97
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 95
photos 93
placing separator sheets between
copies 96
quick copy 92
reducing 95
selecting a tray 94
to a different size 93
using the ADF 92
using the scanner glass
(flatbed) 93
copying different paper sizes 94
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 97
copying on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 95
copying on letterhead 93
copying on transparencies 93
copying photos 93
corrupted printer hard disk 249
creating a fax destination shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 113
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 122
creating profiles
using the ScanBack Utility 125
custom name
configuring 76
Custom Names menu 140
custom paper type
assigning 76
custom paper type name
creating 76
Custom Scan Sizes menu 140
Custom Type [x]
changing paper type 76
Custom Types menu 139
D
date and time, fax
setting 112
daylight savings time, faxing 113
Default Source menu 132
different paper sizes, copying 94
directory list
printing 90
disk wiping 215
display troubleshooting
display is blank 260
Index 312
display shows only diamonds 260
display, printer control panel 15
adjusting brightness 65
disposing of printer hard disk 214
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 111
documents, printing
from Macintosh 83
from Windows 83
duplexing 95
E
Eco‑Mode setting 63
Edit Security Setups menu 155
Embedded Web Server
accessing 22, 233
adjusting brightness 65
checking printer status 233
checking supplies 224
creating a fax destination
shortcut 113
creating an FTP shortcut 122
creating e‑mail shortcuts 103
functions 233
initial fax setup 109
problem accessing 290
scanning to a computer using 124
setting up e‑mail alerts 234
using 233
Embedded Web Server—Security:
Administrator’s Guide
where to find 233
emission notices 294, 298, 302, 303
encrypting the printer hard
disk 216
enlarging a copy 95
envelopes
loading in multipurpose feeder 72
tips on using 87
environmental settings
conserving supplies 62
Eco‑Mode 63
Hibernate Mode 64
printer display brightness,
adjusting 65
Quiet Mode 63
Sleep Mode 64
standard exit bin lighting 65
Erase Temporary Data Files
menu 158
erasing hard disk memory 215
erasing non‑volatile memory 215
erasing volatile memory 214
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 54
Ethernet port 52
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 54
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 23
exporting a configuration using the
Embedded Web Server 23
exterior of the printer
cleaning 218
e‑mail
canceling 105
e‑mail alert
different paper is needed 234
notice of low supply level 234
notice of paper jam 234
e‑mail function
setting up 102
e‑mail options
Send As 107
e‑mail screen
advanced options 107
options 105, 106, 107
E‑mail Settings menu 183
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 103
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 104
using the touch screen 104
e‑mailing
adding message line 105
adding subject line 105
advanced options 107
configuring e‑mail settings 102
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 103
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 103
setting up e‑mail function 102
using a shortcut number 104
using the address book 104
using the touch screen 104
F
factory defaults
restoring 234
FAQ about color printing 287
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 268
fax and e‑mail functions are not set
up 268
fax connection
connecting the printer to the wall
jack 110
connecting to a DSL line 110
connecting to a PBX or ISDN 110
fax connections
regional adapters 111
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 173
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 181
fax screen
advanced options 119
options 118, 119
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 268
can receive but not send
faxes 271
can send but not receive
faxes 270
cannot send or receive a fax 269
received fax has poor print
quality 271
faxing
advanced options 119
blocking junk faxes 117
canceling a fax job 117, 118
changing resolution 116
configuring the printer to observe
daylight saving time 113
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 113
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 114
distinctive ring service 111
fax setup 109
forwarding faxes 120
holding faxes 120
making a fax lighter or darker 116
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 116
sending using the touch
screen 114
setting the date and time 112
setting the fax number or station
number 112
setting the outgoing fax name or
station name 112
Index 313
viewing a fax log 117
FCC notices 294, 298, 302
features
Scan Center 125
finding more information about the
printer 9
finding printer IP address 22
Finishing menu 201
firmware card
installing 31
flash drive
printing from 84
Flash Drive menu 193
flash drives
supported file types 85
flash memory card
installing 31
troubleshooting 274
font sample list
printing 89
Forms and Favorites
setting up 24
forwarding faxes 120
FTP
advanced options 128
scanning using address book 123
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 123
FTP screen
options 126, 127, 128
FTP Settings menu 189
fuser
ordering 225
G
General Settings menu 160
Green settings
Eco‑Mode 63
Quiet Mode 63
green settings
Hibernate Mode 64
H
hardware options, adding
print driver 53
held jobs 88
printing from a Macintosh
computer 89
printing from Windows 89
Help menu 212
Hibernate Mode
using 64
hiding icons on the home screen 22
holding faxes 120
home screen
hiding icons 22
showing icons 22
home screen buttons and icons
description 17
HTML menu 210
I
Image menu 211
imaging unit
replacing 226
imaging units
ordering 225
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 23
importing a configuration using the
Embedded Web Server 23
initial fax setup 109
using the Embedded Web
Server 109
Install Tray [x] 249
installing a memory card 29
installing an Internal Solutions
Port 32
installing on a wireless network
using Windows 55
installing options
550‑sheet tray and printer
stand 38
order of installation 38
installing printer 53
on wireless network 55
installing printer hard disk 35
installing printer on a wireless
network
using Macintosh 57
installing trays
550‑sheet tray 45
internal print server
troubleshooting 274
Internal Solutions Port
changing port settings 60
installing 32
troubleshooting 274
IP address, printer
finding 22
IPv6 menu 146
J
jams
avoiding 236
locating jam areas 236
locations 236
numbers 236
jams, clearing
200 paper jam 238
201 paper jam 239
203 paper jam 240
230 paper jam 240
231–239 paper jams 241
24x paper jam 242
250 paper jam 245
280–289 paper jam 245
28x 219
290–292 paper jams 246
451 paper jam 246
Job Accounting menu 200
L
labels, paper
tips 87
letterhead
copying on 93
loading, multipurpose feeder 86
loading, trays 86
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears on
prints 278
light, indicator 15
linking trays 75, 76
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 251
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 250
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 251
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 251
loading
550‑sheet tray (standard or
optional) 68
multipurpose feeder 72
loading card stock
in multipurpose feeder 72
loading envelopes
in multipurpose feeder 72
loading letterhead
paper orientation 86
loading the multipurpose feeder 72
Index 314
loading the standard tray 68
loading transparencies
in multipurpose feeder 72
M
making copies using paper from
selected tray 94
max speed
using 90
max yield
using 90
memory
types installed on printer 214
memory card
installing 29
troubleshooting 275
menu settings page
printing 53
menus
Active NIC 143
AppleTalk 148
Confidential Print 157
Configure MP 136
Copy Settings 169
Custom Names 140
Custom Scan Sizes 140
Custom Types 139
Default Source 132
diagram of 129
Edit Security Setups 155
Erase Temporary Data Files 158
E‑mail Settings 183
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 173
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 181
Finishing 201
Flash Drive 193
FTP Settings 189
General Settings 160
Help 212
HTML 210
Image 211
IPv6 146
Job Accounting 200
Miscellaneous 156
Network [x] 143
Network Card 145
Network Reports 145
Paper Loading 138
Paper Size/Type 133
Paper Weight 136
Parallel [x] 150
PCL Emul 207
PDF 206
PictBridge 212
PostScript 206
Quality 203
Reports 141
Security Audit Log 158
Serial [x] 152
Set Date/Time 159
Settings 198
SMTP Setup menu 154
Standard Network 143
Standard USB 148
Substitute Size 136
Supplies 130
TCP/IP 145
Universal Setup 140
Utilities 205
Wireless 147
XPS 206
menus diagram 129
Miscellaneous menu 156
mobile device
printing from 84
moving the printer 232
moving your printer 10
multipurpose feeder
loading 72
My MFP
setting up 25
N
Network [x] menu 143
Network Card menu 145
Network Reports menu 145
network setup page
printing 53
noise emission levels 294
non‑volatile memory 214
erasing 215
notices 293, 294, 295, 296, 297,
298, 299, 300, 301, 302, 303
O
optional 550‑sheet tray
installing 45
options
firmware card 31
firmware cards 27
flash memory card 31
Internal Solutions Port,
installing 32
list 27
memory card, installing 29
memory cards 27
printer hard disk, installing 35
options, touch‑screen
copy 99, 100, 101, 127
e‑mail 105, 106, 107
fax 118, 119
FTP 126, 127, 128
ordering
toner cartridges 224
ordering a fuser 225
ordering a transfer module 225
ordering a waste toner bottle 225
ordering imaging units 225
output file type
changing 105
scan image 126
P
paper
characteristics 77
different sizes, copying 94
letterhead 78
preprinted forms 78
recycled 78
saving 97
selecting 78
storing 77, 79
unacceptable 78
Universal size setting 68
using recycled 62
Paper changes needed 251
paper characteristics 77
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 275
paper jams
avoiding 236
paper jams, clearing
231‑239 paper jams 241
24x paper jam 242
250 paper jam 245
280–289 paper jam 245
28x 219
290–292 paper jams 246
451 paper jam 246
Paper Loading menu 138
paper size
setting 68
Paper Size/Type menu 133
Index 315
paper sizes
supported 80
paper type
setting 68
paper types
duplex support 82
supported by printer 82
where to load 82
Paper Weight menu 136
Parallel [x] menu 150
PCL Emul menu 207
PDF menu 206
photos
copying 93
PictBridge menu 212
placing separator sheets between
copies 96
port settings
configuring 60
PostScript menu 206
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 54
print driver
hardware options, adding 53
print job
canceling, from computer 91
print quality
cleaning the ADF parts 219
cleaning the printhead lenses 220
cleaning the scanner glass 218
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 282
characters have jagged edges 276
clipped images 276
fine horizontal lines 277
gray background 277
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears
on prints 278
poor transparency quality 287
print irregularities 279
print is too dark 280
print is too light 281
repeating defects appear on a
page 282
shadow images appear on
prints 283
skewed print 284
solid color pages 284
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 285
streaked vertical lines on
prints 285
toner fog or background shading
on the page 286
toner rubs off 286
toner specks 286
uneven print density 287
print troubleshooting
error reading flash drive 260
held jobs do not print 261
incorrect characters print 262
incorrect margins 277
jammed pages are not
reprinted 276
job prints from wrong tray 262
job prints on wrong paper 262
jobs do not print 260
Large jobs do not collate 263
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 260
paper curl 279
paper frequently jams 275
print job takes longer than
expected 262
tray linking does not work 262
unexpected page breaks
occur 263
printer 53
configurations 11
minimum clearances 10
models 11
moving 10, 232
selecting a location 10
shipping 232
printer control panel 15
adjusting brightness 65
factory defaults, restoring 234
printer hard disk
disposing of 214
encrypting 216
installing 35
removing 36
troubleshooting 274
wiping 215
printer hard disk encryption 216
printer hard disk memory
erasing 215
printer information
where to find 9
printer IP address
finding 22
printer messages
1565 Emulation error, load
emulation option 252
30.xx Missing [color] cartridge
and/or [color] imaging unit 252
31.xx Missing or Defective [color]
cartridge 252
32.xx [color] cartridge part
number unsupported by
device 252
34 Incorrect paper size, open
[src] 253
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 253
36 Printer service required 253
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
operation 253
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 253
37 Insufficient memory, some
Held Jobs were deleted 253
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 254
38 Memory full 254
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 254
51 Defective flash detected 254
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 254
53 Unformatted flash
detected 254
54 Network [x] software error 255
54 Serial option [x] error 254
54 Standard network software
error 255
55 Unsupported option in slot
[x] 255
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 255
56 Serial port [x] disabled 255
56 Standard parallel port
disabled 256
56 Standard USB port
disabled 256
56 USB port [x] disabled 256
57 Configuration change, some
held jobs were not restored 256
58 Input config error 256
58 Too many disks installed 256
58 Too many flash options
installed 257
58 Too many trays attached 257
Index 316
61 Remove defective disk 257
62 Disk full 257
80.xx Fuser life warning 258
80.xx Fuser missing 258
80.xx Fuser near life warning 257
80.xx Replace fuser 258
82.xx Replace waste toner
bottle 258
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly
full 258
83.xx Replace transfer
module 258
83.xx Transfer module life
warning 258
83.xx Transfer module
missing 258
84 Defective [color] imaging
unit 259
84 unsupported [color] imaging
unit 259
84.xx [color] imaging unit low 259
84.xx [color] imaging unit nearly
low 259
84.xx Replace [color] imaging unit
and [color] cartridge 259
88.2x Replace [color]
cartridge 260
88.xx [color] cartridge low 259
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly
low 259
Adjusting color 247
an error has occurred with the
USB drive 247
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 248
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 248
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 247
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load
[orientation] 248
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] [paper type] 248
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] [paper type] load
[orientation] 248
Close [tray] door 248
Close front or side door 249
Disk corrupted 249
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 249
Disk problem 249
Insert Tray [x] 249
Install Tray [x] 249
Load [src] with [custom
string] 250
Load [src] with [custom type
name] 250
Load [src] with [size] 250
Load [src] with [type] [size] 250
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 251
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 250
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 251
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 251
Paper changes needed 251
Remove paper from standard
output bin 251
Replace separator pad 251
Restore held jobs? 251
Some held jobs were not
restored 252
Supply needed to complete
job 252
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 252
Unsupported disk 252
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 249
printer options troubleshooting
cannot detect flash memory
card 274
cannot detect printer hard
disk 274
internal print server 274
Internal Solutions Port 274
memory card 275
option does not work 273
paper tray problems 273
USB/parallel interface card 275
printer problems, solving basic 247
printer security
information on 233
printhead lenses
cleaning 220
printing
black‑and‑white 83
canceling, from the printer control
panel 90
directory list 90
font sample list 89
from a mobile device 84
from flash drive 84
from Macintosh 83
from Windows 83
max speed and max yield 90
menu settings page 53
network setup page 53
printing a directory list 90
printing a document 83
printing a font sample list 89
printing a menu settings page 53
printing a network setup page 53
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from a Macintosh computer 89
from Windows 89
printing from a flash drive 84
printing from a mobile device 84
printing in black and white 83
publications
where to find 9
Q
Quality menu 203
Quiet Mode
print quality troubleshooting 277
R
recycled paper
using 62, 78
recycling
Lexmark packaging 66
Lexmark products 66
toner cartridges 66
reducing a copy 95
reducing printer noise 63
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 25
Remove paper from standard
output bin 251
removing printer hard disk 36
repeat print jobs 88
printing from a Macintosh
computer 89
printing from Windows 89
Replace separator pad 251
replacing a toner cartridge 228
replacing an imaging unit 226
replacing supplies
imaging unit 226
Index 317
toner cartridge 228
waste toner bottle 230
replacing the waste toner
bottle 230
reports
viewing 234
Reports menu 141
reserve print jobs 88
printing from a Macintosh
computer 89
printing from Windows 89
resolution, fax
changing 116
Restore held jobs? 251
restoring factory default
settings 234
S
safety information 7, 8
saving paper 97
Scan Center features 125
scan image
output file type 126
scan options
Send As 126
Scan to Network
setting up 24
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a computer 268
partial document or photo
scans 267
scan was not successful 266
scanner unit does not close 264
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 266
ScanBack Utility
using 125
scanner
functions 13
scanner glass
cleaning 218
using 14
scanner glass (flatbed)
copying using 93
scanning
from a flash drive 125
quick copy 92
to a computer using the
Embedded Web Server 124
to an FTP address 123
to an FTP, using address book 123
using the Automatic Document
Feeder (ADF) 14
using the scanner glass 14
scanning to a computer
using the Embedded Web
Server 124
scanning to a flash drive 125
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 122
using shortcut numbers 123
using the address book 123
using the touch screen 123
Security Audit Log menu 158
security Web page
printer security information 233
selecting paper 78
Send As
e‑mail options 107
scan options 126
sending a fax using shortcuts 115
sending a fax using the
computer 114
sending a fax using the touch
screen 114
sending fax
using shortcuts 115
using the address book 115
sending fax at a scheduled
time 116
sending fax using the address
book 115
Serial [x] menu 152
serial printing
setting up 60
Set Date/Time menu 159
setting
TCP/IP address 145
setting the fax number or station
number 112
setting the outgoing fax name or
station name 112
setting the paper size 68
setting the paper type 68
setting the Universal paper size 68
setting up e‑mail alerts
using the Embedded Web
Server 234
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 268
setting up serial printing 60
Settings menu 198
shadow images appear on
prints 283
shipping the printer 232
shortcuts, creating
e‑mail 103
fax destination 113, 114
FTP address 123
FTP destination 122
showing icons on the home
screen 22
Sleep Mode
adjusting 64
SMTP Setup menu 154
Some held jobs were not
restored 252
standard exit bin
lighting, setting 65
Standard Network menu 143
standard tray
loading 68
Standard USB menu 148
statement of volatility 214
status of supplies
checking 224
storing
paper 79
supplies 223
storing print jobs 88
streaked horizontal lines appear on
prints 285
subject and message information
adding to e‑mail 105
Substitute Size menu 136
supplies
checking status 224
checking, from printer control
panel 224
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 224
conserving 62
storing 223
using recycled paper 62
Supplies menu 130
supplies, ordering
ADF pick roll 225
ADF separator roll 225
fuser 225
imaging units 225
toner cartridges 224
transfer module 225
waste toner bottle 225
Supply needed to complete job 252
Index 318
supported flash drives 85
supported paper sizes 80
system board
accessing 27
system board cover
reattaching 27
T
TCP/IP menu 145
telecommunication
notices 298, 299, 300, 301
tips
card stock 88
labels, paper 87
on using envelopes 87
on using letterhead 86
on using transparencies 86
tips on using envelopes 87
tips on using letterhead 86
toner cartridge
replacing 228
toner cartridges
ordering 224
recycling 66
toner darkness
adjusting 83
toner fog or background shading
appears on the page 286
touch screen
buttons 18
transfer module
ordering 225
transparencies
copying on 93
loading 86
loading in multipurpose feeder 72
tips on using 86
using 86
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 252
trays
linking 75, 76
unlinking 75, 76
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 272
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 290
checking an unresponsive
printer 247
checking an unresponsive
scanner 266
contacting customer support 291
FAQ about color printing 287
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 268
Scan to Network 272
solving basic printer
problems 247
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 263
partial document or photo
copies 265
poor copy quality 264
poor scanned image quality 267
scanner unit does not close 264
troubleshooting, display
display is blank 260
display shows only diamonds 260
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 268
can receive but not send
faxes 271
can send but not receive
faxes 270
cannot send or receive a fax 269
received fax has poor print
quality 271
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 275
troubleshooting, print
error reading flash drive 260
held jobs do not print 261
incorrect characters print 262
incorrect margins 277
jammed pages are not
reprinted 276
job prints from wrong tray 262
job prints on wrong paper 262
jobs do not print 260
Large jobs do not collate 263
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 260
paper curl 279
paper frequently jams 275
print job takes longer than
expected 262
tray linking does not work 262
unexpected page breaks
occur 263
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 282
characters have jagged edges 276
clipped images 276
fine horizontal lines 277
gray background 277
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears
on prints 278
poor transparency quality 287
print irregularities 279
print is too dark 280
print is too light 281
repeating defects appear on a
page 282
shadow images appear on
prints 283
skewed print 284
solid color pages 284
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 285
streaked vertical lines on
prints 285
toner fog or background shading
on the page 286
toner rubs off 286
toner specks 286
uneven print density 287
troubleshooting, printer options
cannot detect flash memory
card 274
cannot detect printer hard
disk 274
internal print server 274
Internal Solutions Port 274
memory card 275
option does not work 273
paper tray problems 273
USB/parallel interface card 275
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a computer 268
partial document or photo
scans 267
scan was not successful 266
scanner unit does not close 264
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 266
U
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 17
uneven print density 287
Universal Paper Size
setting 68
Universal Setup menu 140
Index 319
unlinking trays 75, 76
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 249
USB port 52
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 275
using Eco‑Mode 63
using Hibernate Mode 64
using max speed and max yield 90
using Quiet Mode 63
using recycled paper 62
using shortcuts
sending fax 115
using the address book
e‑mailing 104
sending fax 115
using the Embedded Web
Server 233
using the ScanBack Utility 125
using the touch‑screen buttons 18
Utilities menu 205
V
verify print jobs 88
printing from a Macintosh
computer 89
printing from Windows 89
viewing
reports 234
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 233
volatile memory 214
erasing 214
volatility
statement of 214
W
waste toner bottle
ordering 225
replacing 230
wiping the printer hard disk 215
Wireless menu 147
wireless network
configuration information 55
installation, using Macintosh 57
installation, using Windows 55
wireless network setup
in Windows 55
wireless printer setup
in Macintosh 57
WS‑Scan
about 25
X
XPS menu 206
Index 320
